Canon Mvx250i Mvx200i e SM

Video Product
MVX250i E MVX200i E MVX200 E

No. D17-8216, 8233 D17-8236 Digital Video Camera
iPAL
Canon Inc. Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.
c CANON INC. 2004
First Edition : Mar. 2004 First Print : Mar. 2004
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

CONTENTS
1. Product Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 Main Features ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1-1 Easy Direct Button ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 1-1-2 DV Messenger 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-2 Product Specifications Comparison Chart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 1-3 Function and Performance List --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 2. Technical Explanation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 2-1 Design ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 2-1-1 Design Concept-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 2-1-2 Design Concept-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 2-1-3 Differences in Appearance of Overseas Models MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E ------------------------ 11 2-2 18 zoom lens -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 2-2-1 Features of 18 lens -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 2-2-2 New technologies and new functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 2-3 Easy Direct Button ([ ] Print/Share button) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 13
2-3-1 Direct Print function -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 2-3-2 Direct Transfer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 2-3-2-1 Startup ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15 2-3-2-2 2-3-2-3 2-3-2-4 2-3-2-5 2-3-2-6 ALL IMAGES ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 NEW IMAGES --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 TRANSFER ORDERS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18 SELECT & TRANSFER --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 WALL PAPER ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
3. Performance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 4. System Diagram (Common to all Models) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35 5. Overview of viewfinder / LCD panel displays --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 5-1 Camera mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 5-2 VCR mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 43 5-3 Card / Camera mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47 5-4 Card Playback mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50 5-4-1 Still image Playback -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50 5-4-2 Motion video (Motion JPEG) Playback ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51 5-4-3 Direct printing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52 5-5 Menu Display --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53 5-6 Card-related screen displays ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64 5-7 Direct print setting screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71 5-8 Print designations ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76 5-9 Warning displays ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1. Product Overview
1-1 Main Features
1-1-1 Easy Direct Button
Easy Direct Button (Print/Share Button)

Enables Easy Printing and PC File Transfer
The button turns on when the camcorder is connected to a printer or PC The light turns on to indicate the button to press next for easy operation
Printer
Lights up!
Print setup information is displayed for 6 seconds
Pressing the Direct button starts printing
PC Visually check that the camcorder is connected correctly Pressing the Direct button starts file transfer to PC
Connection to Printer / PC
The Transfer menu is displayed
1-1-2 DV Messenger 2
A peer-to-peer (P2P) type bidirectional communications software using DV (Digital Video Camcorder) Allows bidirectional sending of audio/video content and messages (text/images) via the Internet. Basic specifications are compatible with Windows Messenger. Allows control (camera zoom and focus, VCR playback and stop, access to the memory card) of the digital video camcorder from a remote PC. Remote home monitoring camera using the web camera function (enables monitoring of your home from a remote location)
IEEE1394 Internet IEEE1394
1-2 Product Specifications Comparison Chart

Specifications Zoom mag. CCD Tape Card MVX250i E optical 18 / digital 360 optical 18 / digital 72 MVX200i E, MVX200 E optical 14 / digital 280 optical 14 / digital 56
1/4.5-inch interlaced CCD (Total pixels : Approx. 1.33 megapixels) (Effective pixels Tape motion video : Approx. 860,000 pixels Card still image: Approx. 1,230,000 pixels)
Image stabilizer Monitor EVF Memory card function Card Still images recording Card motion video recording USB file transfer Direct print File transfer Streaming USB compatibility Accessory shoe Auxiliary illumination function Night mode High-resolution 16:9 END search S-Video terminal DV, analog line inputs Microphone terminal Wide attachment lens supplied Remote controller supplied battery
Electronic image stabilizer (during tape mode only) 2.5-inch 123,000 pixel LCD monitor 0.33-inch 113,000 pixel color viewfinder (SD memory card, MultiMediaCard) Progressive Photo (1024768, 640480) AVI (Video data: Motion JPEG / Audio data: WAVE (monaural)) (Support for Direct Print, Bubble Jet Direct, and PictBridge) IEEE1394 / USB IEEE1394 (USB 2.0 Full Speed class with PTP support) (Advanced accessory shoe not supported) White LED (Night+ : always on) (Super Night : Lights in accordance with brightness) (Night, Night+, Super Night) (Letterbox display) NB-2LH (MVX250i E only is supplied with BP-2L14) *1 : Not applicable to MVX200 E *1 (Night)
1-3 Function and Performance List

Item Camera Image sensing device Image size System (filter) Total pixels Effective pixels Tape Card Lens Optical zoom magnification, focal length (35mm equivalent) Card Tape 1/4.5-inch CCD Interlacing (color correction filter) Approx. 1.33 megapixels Approx. 860,000 pixels Approx. 1,230,000 pixels MVX250i E : 18 3.5 to 63 mm (Approx. 45.4 to 817.2 mm) MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 14 3.5 to 49 mm (Approx. 45.4 to 635.6 mm) MVX250i E : 18 3.5 to 63 mm (Approx. 37.9 to 682.2 mm) MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 14 3.5 to 49 mm (Approx. 37.9 to 530.6 mm) Digital zoom magnification focal length (35mm equivalent) Card Magnification Tape MVX250i E : 72 / 360 252 mm / 1,260 mm (Approx. 3,269 mm / 16,344 mm equivalent) MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56 / 280 196 mm / 980 mm (Approx. 2,542 mm / 12,712 mm equivalent) MVX250i E : 72 Approx. 252 mm (Approx. 2,728.8 mm equivalent) MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56 Approx. 196 mm (Approx. 2,122.4 mm equivalent) System Tape Card F number Tape CCD readout CCD readout MVX250i E : F1.8 to 3.4 MVX200i E, MVX200 E : F1.8 to 3.1 Card MVX250i E : F1.8 to 3.4 MVX200i E, MVX200 E : F1.8 to 3.1 Aperture leaves (Number of leaves) Zoom speed Filter diameter Noise reduction Camera Tape Card
Motion video Still image
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
2 leaves Variable 34mm P0.5 Either CCD-NR or Y/C-NR None Chroma-only, median filter C-NR system 1.5 lx 3.0 lx
Recorder Minimum illumination Night mode Low Light mode
Auto mode(when auto slow shutter is selected) 6.0 lx Image stabilization Sensing method Image stabilization system Tape Card Electronic system None Angular velocity sensing

Item Shooting functions AE mode Program AE Tape (Full Auto) (Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Surf & Snow, Low Light, Night, Night+*, Super Night * (* : MVX250i E only)) Card (Full Auto) (Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Surf & Snow, Low Light, Night, Night+*, Super Night * (* : MVX250i E only)) Photometric system Evaluation photometry (128segments) + All area photometry Evaluative photometry (128segments) Exposure adjustment AE lock AE shift Exposure correction Tape
&
Center-bottom-weighted average Tape
Full Auto, Auto, Sports, Portrait, Low Light, Night, Night+*, Super Night* (* : MVX250i E only) 128 segments (Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow (Sand & Snow mode))
Card Card
Full Auto, Auto, Sports, Portrait, Low Light, Night, Night+*, Super Night* (* : MVX250i E only) (Except Green mode) 11 steps (Disabled in Green mode, Spotlight mode, and Surf & Snow mode)
Manual gain setting Back light correction Shutter speed Auto mode Tape
1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON), 1/50 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF)
Card
1/12.5 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter ON), 1/25 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF)
Auto (Shutter speed setting) Low Light Night, Night+*, Super Night* (* MVX250i E only) Iris control Auxiliary light Flash Video light White LED Image quality adjustment (Custom preset) Color gain adjustment Hue adjustment Sharpness adjustment Setup adjustment White balance Auto Preset Systems Focus Mode Manual focus 16:9 Recording system Tape
Tape Card
6 levels (1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec) 3 levels (1/50, 1/120, 1/250 sec) 1/12.5 sec (Low Light mode)
Tape Card
1/6 to 1/500 sec 1/2 to 1/250 sec Auto iris (MVX250i E only) Outdoor, Indoor TTL, 128 segments AF/MF, forced infinity SET button operation
High image quality 16:9
Card Area marker display

Item Shooting functions Digital fade Tape Motion video Auto Fade, Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide (Activated by pressing Start/Stop button) Still image Card Motion video Still image Digital effect Tape Card Card mix Tape Card Multi-screen Tape Card Capture speed MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
Motion video/still image Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror Motion video/still image Black & White Motion video/still image Card Lumi key, Card Chroma key, Camera Chroma key, Animation Motion video/still image Motion video/still image Supported (Disabled in Night mode, Night+ mode, and Super Night mode) Motion video/still image Shutter speed 1/25sec Manual, Fast (4 fields), Normal (6 fields), Slow (8 fields) Shutter speed < 1/25sec Manual, Fast (4 fields), Normal (8 fields), Slow (12 fields) 4 (2 2) / 9 (3 3) / 16 (4 4) miniDV (SP, LP) Image size Shooting time 320 240, 160 120 dots SDC-8M 320 240 dots (continuous, approx. 20 sec) 160 120 dots (continuous, approx. 50 sec) MMC-8M 320 240 dots (continuous, approx. 10 sec) 160 120 dots (continuous, approx. 30 sec) per shot
Screen segments Motion video shooting Tape Card (MVX250i E)
Still image recording
Tape Card Recording system Recording image Single image Continuous shooting AEB Image size Image quality Photo button Form Pressed halfway down Card review Flash photography
Progressive photo Frame image (Fast, Normal) 1280 960, 640 480 Super Fine, Fine, Normal Dedicated still image button (in card mode only) (Only during recording standby) (image setting menu obtained by pressing photo button + SET button) (with VFL-1 (sold separately) attached (MVX250i E only) (MVX250i E only, equipped with white LED (lights in Super Night mode, Night+ mode)) (VL-3 support in MVX250i E only (Advanced accessory shoe)) 10 sec / Remote controller : 2 seconds VGA : 640(H) 480 (V), SXGA : 1280(H) 960(V) / JPEG SD memory card, MultiMediaCard Power shutoff
Negative-positive reversal Built-in Video light
Zebra pattern Color bar display Self-timer Interval timer Clearscan Recorded image size and file format Memory card REC Search REC Review Standby switch Power save (After five minutes in Recording pause)

Item Shooting functions Displayed text recording Audio 16-bit 2-ch (48KHz) 12-bit 4-ch (32 kHz) Simultaneous 4-channel recording not possible Wind screen EVF Size Pixels Brightness adjustment Color adjustment Movable LCD monitor Screen size Pixels Brightness adjustment Movable VCR Playback system Frame playback Slow playback 2X SP playback 1X SP playback Cue / review Search Photo search Date search Index search End search Special playback Playback zoom (5 zoom) effects D. effects Tape Card D. fade Tape Card Multi screen Data code display Card Slide show Index playback (6-screen playback) Card fast forward / rewind Audio dubbing AV insert Zero set memory Editing functions Simple editing Special effects Card jump (Model MVX200 E : built-in microphone only) Forward / Reverse Forward / Reverse Forward / Reverse Forward / Reverse 11.5 speed (In tape playback and card still image playback) Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror Black & White Auto fade, Wipe, Corner wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zig Zag, Beam, Tide 4, 9 or 16 screens (Tape only) Time and Date display With AUTO/OFF switch (built-in microphone only) 0.33-inch (TFT color RGB delta arrangement) 113,000 pixels 2.5-inch 123,000 pixels mirror shooting supported MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Item System Interface (terminal) Microphone input Headphone output DV terminal S-Video terminal AV terminal (MVX250i E only) (Also serves as AV terminal) Input / output. (However, output only on MVX200 E models.) Input / output. (However, output only on MVX200 E models.) Input/output, 3.5mm jack (also serves as headphone terminal. However, output only on MVX200 E models.) Editing terminals (LANC terminal) USB port (mini-B Receptacle USB 2.0 Full Speed) Memory card file transfer Analog DV signal conversion Direct printer Camera direct Photo direct PictBridge (excluding model MVX200 E) (CP-10, CP-100) (PIXUS 50i, PIXUS BJ 895PD, PIXUS BJ 535PD) (CP-200/PC-300, Pixus 990i and other PictBridge compatible bubblejet printers) My Camera settings Startup screen creation Startup screen selection Startup sound Shutter sound Self-timer sound World clock (Date display (Japanese, North American or European format can be selected)) Text titles Speaker Confirmation beep Tally lamp Remote control cord Accessory shoe Video ID Recording media Tape Card Illuminated keys Custom keys Night mode key DV control Internal battery charging Backup power Battery pack power Supports 1 and 2, (Advanced accessory shoe compatible MVX250i E model only) (ID2 : NTSC only) miniDV, SP,LP SD memory card, MultiMediaCard (CA-570 connection) Lithium coin battery (CR1616) NB-2L, NB-2LH, BP-2L12, and BP-2L14 lithium ion batteries MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
External View
Fig. 1
2. Technical Explanation
2-1 Design
2-1-1 Design Concept-1
<Parallel Layout Design> New concept design with short height Size about 40% smaller than the MVX3i E
2-1-2 Design Concept-2
<Distinctive Body Design> The design has a distinctive character line crossing diagonally over the lens section. In this design, a brilliant metallic coating creates remarkable highlights and shadows under light for creating a stunning impression.
<Brilliant Metallic Color> Metallic colors are used for the cassette cover side. Metal and chrome parts are also used for the lens ring and Megapixel badge to provide a sense of refinement.
<Round Grip> In addition to the round-shaped grip for enabling a stronger grip, the finger grips use elastomer for allowing a firm hold.
<Easy Direct Buttons> This is the first DVC to use the Easy Direct Buttons. This makes printing as easy as pressing a button.
10
2-1-3 Differences in Appearance of Overseas Models MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Model MVX250i E
Model MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Grip top/Front lens Side/Side connector cover are molded Gray color (finish is not used for cost reasons)
In comparison to the lens barrel section, alow-contrast two-tone design is used with alow-brightness, brilliant silver metallic finish.
Bluish, high-brilliance metallic finish
11
2-2 18 zoom lens

2-2-1 Features of 18 lens
Highest zoom ratio in a mechanical unit Extremely high cost-performance ratio
2-2-2 New technologies and new functions

A two-sided aspherical lens and high-refraction glass are arranged efficiently to minimize the size despite an increased number of lenses. The movement amount of the compensator near the tele end was also increased to reduce the load on the variator and achieve an efficient zoom ratio over the entire short length.
Lens incorporated in MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
Lens incorporated in MVX3i E
12
2-3 Easy Direct Button ([

2-3-1 Direct Print function
] Print/Share button)
The Easy Direct Button enables you to immediately start printing by simply connecting the video camera to a Camera Direct compatible printer and pressing the button while it is lit. (1)Connect the printer, and then turn on the printer. (2)Set the video camera to Card Playback mode. (3)Once the connection is made with the printer ( the button to start printing.
(1)
SETUP
or other indicator is displayed), the
button lights up blue. Press
Off Direct printer connection (2)
Press the On
button
Press the SETUP button (3)
(Press the MENU button)
Press the SETUP button
Off
Flashing
* When still images are displayed for the first time after connection, the setting status appears over the screen (2) for six seconds (figure at right).
Button operation guide Button lights up : Indicates button operation is possible. Button turns off : Indicates button operation is not possible. Button flashing : Indicates printing is in progress.
The procedure for previous models is shown below. (1)Connect the printer, and then turn on the printer. (2)Set the video camera to Card Playback mode. (3)Once the connection is made with the printer (
SETUP
is displayed), press the SETUP button.
(4)This changes to the Print Setting screen. Check that you are ready to start printing, and then press the SETUP button to start printing. With the Easy Direct Button, step (3) is eliminated for even easier searching and printing of multiple images.
13
2-3-2 Direct Transfer

The Direct Transfer function uses the Easy Direct Button [ images to a computer. ] to easily transfer
When the video camera is connected to a computer and set to Card Playback mode, the Transfer menu is displayed on the video camera LCD screen. The user simply selects the desired option from the menu and presses the Direct button to easily transfer the image to the computer. ZoomBrowser 4.6, which supports Direct Transfer, must already be installed on the computer. The supported OS are Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows ME, and Windows 98 (Macintosh is not supported). The transferred image is saved in a folder designated by ZoomBrowser. The available files types for transfer are JPEG and Motion-JPEG (MPEG-4 is not supported). (Note that only JPEG files can be transferred in the PC Wallpaper option.) The Transfer menu has the following five options. ALL IMAGES... NEW IMAGES... TRANSFER ORDERS... : This transfers all images recorded in the memory card to the computer. : This transfers images in the memory card that have not been already transferred. : This uses the DPOF function to transfer only images with a check mark. Note that the images need to be designated for sending at the Send Designation Setting screen beforehand. SELECT &TRANSFER... WALLPAPER... : The user checks the images one at a time before transferring. : This enables the user to check the image one at a time before transferring and setting as the computers wallpaper in realtime.
14
2-3-2-1 Startup
Set the video camera to Card Playback mode, and then connect to a computer with a USB cable. Direct Transfer does not start unless a memory card is loaded. After Direct Transfer is started, the image that is displayed first is determined by the following conditions. 1. No Image Warning is displayed if there are no recorded images in the memory card. 2. The Menu screen is displayed when the option that was last executed is not recorded, such as when using for the first time. 3. If ALL IMAGES , NEW IMAGES or TRANSFER ORDERS is recorded as the last executed option, the Direct Transfer menu screen is displayed. 4. If SELECT &TRANSFER or screen is displayed. WALL PAPER is recorded as the last executed option, the SELECT &TRANSFER
Function
Operation The computer and video camera are connected by a USB cable.
Description
Startup
This proceeds to the Menu screen.
Startup condition 4
Startup conditions 2 and 3
Button turns off
Menu screen
Function Operation Description ALL IMAGES : See NEW IMAGES : See 2.3.2.2 2.3.2.3 . . 2.3.2.4 2.3.2.5 . .
TRANSFER ORDERS : See SELECT &TRANSFER : See WALL PAPER : See 2.3.2.6
Button lights up
Select Image screen

Function Operation Description SELECT &TRANSFER : See WALL PAPER : See 2.3.2.6 2.3.2.5
Button lights up No Image Warning screen
15
2-3-2-2
ALL IMAGES
This transfers all images in the camera and saves them to the computer.
Menu screen
Function Transfer all images Operation Description Move the [SET] button up and down to select This proceeds to the Confirm Transfer images, and then press screen. down the [SET] button. Move the [SET] button The transfer confirmation is omitted, and up and down to select the Transfer in Progress screen is images, and then press displayed. down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as button. the selected function.
[SET]
Confirm Transfer screen

Function Cancel OK Operation
Button lights up
Description
Move the [SET] button This cancels the selected function and returns to the Menu screen. up and down to select images, and then press This performs the transfer and proceeds to down the [SET] button. the Transfer in Progress screen.
Cancel
OK
Button turns off
Transfer in Progress screen (with progress bar)
Function Cancel
Operation Press down the [SET] or [MENU] button.
Description This cancels the transfer and returns to the Menu screen.
Button turns off Finish Transfer or Cancel

The transfer progress is based on the Number of images for which transfer was completed/Total number of images to be transferred. If the number of images exceeds 9999, the value is fixed at 9999.
Return to Menu screen
16
2-3-2-3
NEW IMAGES
All untransferred images are transferred and saved to the computer.
Menu screen
Function Operation Description Move the [SET] button Transfer up and down to select This proceeds to the Confirm Transfer untransferred images, and then press screen. images down the [SET] button. Move the [SET] button The transfer confirmation is omitted, and up and down to select the Transfer in Progress screen is images, and then press displayed. down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as button. the selected function.
[SET]
Confirm Transfer screen

Function Cancel OK Operation
Button lights up
Description
Move the [SET] button This cancels the selected function and returns to the Menu screen. up and down to select images, and then press This performs the transfer and proceeds to down the [SET] button. the Transfer in Progress screen.
Cancel
OK Button lights up

Function Cancel Operation Press down the [SET] or [MENU] button. Description This cancels the transfer and returns to the Menu screen.
Finish Transfer or Cancel
Button lights up The transfer progress is based on the Number of images for which transfer was completed/Total number of images to be transferred. If the number of images exceeds 9999, the value is fixed at 9999.
17
2-3-2-4
TRANSFER ORDERS
All images designated for sending are transferred and saved to the computer.
Menu screen
Function Transfer senddesignated images Operation Description Move the [SET] button up and down to select This proceeds to the Confirm Transfer images, and then press screen. down the [SET] button. Move the [SET] button The transfer confirmation is omitted, and up and down to select the Transfer in Progress screen is images, and then press displayed. down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as button. the selected function.
[SET]
Button lights up Confirm Transfer screen

Function Cancel OK Operation Description Move the [SET] button This cancels the selected function and returns to the Menu screen. up and down to select images, and then press This performs the transfer and proceeds to down the [SET] button. the Transfer in Progress screen.
Cancel
OK
Button turns off
Analyzing Send-designated Images screen

Function Operation Description After analysis of the send-designated images is complete, this proceeds to the Transfer in Progress screen (with progress bar).
Analysis Complete
Button turns off

Function Cancel Operation Press down the [SET] or [MENU] button. Description This cancels the transfer and returns to the Menu screen.
Button turns off Finish Transfer or Cancel

The transfer progress is based on the Number of images for which transfer was completed/Total number of images to be transferred. If the number of images exceeds 9999, the value is fixed at 9999.
18
2-3-2-5
SELECT & TRANSFER
The user views the images one at a time and transfers and saves them to the computer.
Menu screen
Function
Operation
Description
Select images for transfer
Move the [SET] button up and down to select This proceeds to the Confirm Transfer images, and then press screen. down the [SET] button. Move the [SET] button The transfer confirmation is omitted, and up and down to select the Transfer in Progress screen is images, and then press displayed. down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as button. the selected function.
] or [SET]
Button lights up Select Image screen

Function Operation Description This transfers the selected images. After inputting the transfer, the user can immediately continue to select other images and input transfer even while the transfer of an image is in progress. If a file that cannot be played is selected for transfer, a warning screen is displayed. If an image is being transferred, this proceeds to the Transfer in Progress screen. This returns to the Menu screen if an image is being transferred. This moves the image selection forward/ backward. Changes can be made even if image transfer is in progress.
Transfer images
Press [SET] or button.
[MENU] button while image transfer is in Menu display Press [ MENU] button. progress [MENU] button while image transfer is not in progress
Change image
Press [CARD +/] buttons.
Image Transfer in Progress screen (no progress bar) Button lights up Button flashing (Image transfer in progress)
Function
Operation
Description When the transfer is completed, this returns to the Menu screen.
Transfer complete
Button flashing Return to Menu screen Warning screen

Function Operation Description The warning screen is displayed for about one second, and then it returns to the Select Image screen.
Button lights up
19
2-3-2-6
WALL PAPER
The user views the images one at a time and transfers and saves them to the computer. The transferred image is displayed on the computer desktop
Menu screen
Function Operation Description Move the [SET] button up and down to select This proceeds to the Confirm Transfer images, and then press screen. Set image as down the [SET] button. computer Move the [SET] button The transfer confirmation is omitted, and wallpaper up and down to select the Transfer in Progress screen is displayed. images, and then press down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as button. the selected function.
] or [SET] button
Button lights up Select Image screen

Function Operation Description This transfers the selected images. After inputting the transfer, the user can immediately continue to select other images and input transfer even while the transfer of an image is in progress. A warning screen is displayed if the transfer is made with a motion video file selected. If an image is being transferred, this proceeds to the Transfer in Progress screen. This returns to the Menu screen if an image is being transferred. This moves the image selection forward/ backward. Changes can be made even if image transfer is in progress.
Transfer images
Press [SET] or button
[MENU] button while image transfer is in Menu display Press [MENU] button progress [MENU] button while image transfer is not in progress
Change image
Press [CARD +/] buttons
Button lights up Image Transfer in Progress screen (no progress bar)
Button flashing (Image transfer in progress)
Function
Operation
Description When the transfer is completed, this returns to the Menu screen.
Button flashing Return to Menu screen Warning screen

Function Operation Description The warning screen is displayed for about one second, and then it returns to the Select Image screen.
Button lights up
20
3. Performance
1 Type 2 Recording system MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E VCR- integrated camera Rotating two-head helical scan azimuth recording Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs) Complies with NTSC system (625 lines, 50 fields) Digital component recording. R-Y, B-Y = 6.75MHz 8bits PCM digital recording. 16-bit : 48KHz 2 ch (Stereo 1) 12-bit : 32KHz 4 ch (Stereo 1 and 2) 2-frequency pilot system Approx. 18.83mm / sec (in SP mode) Approx. 12.57mm / sec (in LP mode) 21.7mm 9000 / 1.001 rotations / minute
2-1 Video signal recording system 2-1-1 Quantized bits 2-2 Audio signal recording system
2-3 Tracking 2-4 Tape speed 2-5 Head drum 2-5-1 Drum diameter 2-5-2 Rpms 2-5-3 Heads 3 Recording / playback time
Video heads : 2 80 minutes maximum (in SP mode), using 80-minute tape 120 minutes maximum (in LP mode), using 80-minute tape 3-1 Continuous recording time / actual recording time / playback time using battery

When viewfinder is used Continuous Actual recording recording NB-2L NB-2LH BP-2L12 BP-2L14 Approx. 95 min Approx.50 min When LCD monitor is used Continuous Actual Continuous recording recording playback Approx. 75 min Approx. 90 min Approx. 40 min Approx. 85 min
Approx.115 min Approx. 65 min
Approx. 50 min Approx.105 min
Approx.200 min Approx.110 min Approx.150 min Approx. 85 min Approx.175 min Approx.240 min Approx.135 min Approx.190 min Approx.105 min Approx.220 min
4 Compatible cassette tape 4-1 Tape type 4-2 Tape width 4-3 Tape thickness 5 Camera 5-1 Image sensing device 5-1-1 Total number of pixels 5-1-2 Effective pixels In tape recording In card recording High- resolution 16: 9 shooting (in tape mode) 5-1-3 Filter 5-1-4 Color separation system 5-1-5 Signal configuration 5-1-6 Scanning system 5-1-7 Minimum subject illumination In Auto mode In Low light mode In Night mode 5-1-8 Subject illumination range
Mini DVC specs Vapor - deposited metal tape 6.35mm 7m or 5.3m 1 / 4.5 - inch interlaced CCD Approx. 1.33 megapixels (1363H 975V) Approx. 860,000 pixels (1072H 804V) Approx. 1,230,000 pixels (1280H 960V) Approx. 920,000 pixels (1280(H) 720(V) when image stabilizer is OFF) Approx. 790,000 pixels (1184(H) 666(V) when image stabilizer is ON) Color correction filter Differential readout NTSC standard color TV signal 625 lines, 50 fields / 25 frames Approx. 6.0 lx (1/25 sec. shutter speed) Approx. 3.0 lx (1/12.5 sec. shutter speed) Approx. 1.5 lx (1/6 sec. shutter speed) Approx. 1.5 lx to approx. 100,000 lx
21

5-2 Photo lens 5-2-1 Nominal focal length Tape recording MVX250i E 3.5 to 63 mm 18 zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 45.4 to 817.2 mm) MVX200i E, MVX200 E 3.5 to 49 mm 14 zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 45.4 to 635.6 mm) Card recording MVX250i E 3.5 to 63 mm 18 zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 37.9 to 682.2 mm) MVX200i E, MVX200 E 3.5 to 49 mm 14 zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 37.9 to 530.6 mm) 5-2-2 Nominal diametric ratio MVX250i E 1 : 1.8 (F3.4 on tele end) 1 : 1.8 (F3.3 on tele end) MVX200i E, MVX200 E 1 : 1.8 (F3.1 on tele end) 5-2-3 Lens configuration 10 elements in 8 groups, using one two- sided aspherical lens 5-2-4 Focus adjustment Inner focus type, manually adjustable (adjusted by rotating multi- dial) 5-2-5 Minimum object distance 10 mm (AF linked ; wide end), 1 m for full zoom area (from lens tip) 5-2-6 Power zoom Multi- level adjustable power zoom. Slide lever operation. Zoom speed can be adjusted by moving slide lever. Manual zoom not possible (No zoom ring) 5-2-6-1 Zoom speed Optical zoom Using electronic zoom 5-2-7 Focal length display 5-2-8 Macro mechanism 5-2-9 Macro shooting distance 5-2-10 Filter diameter 5-2-11 Accessory lens, filter 5-2-12 Lens hood 5-2-13 Lens cap 5-3 Digital zoom 5-3-1 During tape recording MVX250i E Approx. 4.3 seconds to approx. 50 seconds Approx. 5.8 seconds to approx. 55 seconds None. Simple zoom display inside finder. Wide end macro 10 mm (from lens front) 34 mm P0.5 Can use WD-H34, TL-H34, FS-34U None Included ; Screw-on type
To 72 (approx. 252 mm (35 mm equivalent : 3,269 mm)), to 360 (approx. 1,260 mm (35 mm equivalent : 16,344 mm)) MVX200i E, MVX200 E To 56 (approx. 196 mm (35 mm equivalent: 2,542 mm)), to 280 (approx. 980 mm (35 mm equivalent : 12,712 mm)) 5-3-2 During card recording MVX250i E To 72 (approx. 252 mm (35 mm equivalent : 2,728.8 mm)) MVX200i E, MVX200 E To 56 (approx. 196 mm (35 mm equivalent : 2,122.4 mm)) 5-4 Image stabilization function Supported 5-4-1 System Electronic image stabilizer 5-4-2 Image stabilization detection Angular velocity sensing (using piezoelectric vibration sensor) 5-5 Shooting modes Motion video shooting mode, photo shooting mode (card recording) 5-5-1 Tape mode Normal motion video is recorded (interlaced scanning) on miniDV cassettes. In addition, when an SD memory card (or MultiMediaCard) is installed and [ ] Fine], or [ ] Normal] is selected for [Photo record] on the menu, still images (640 480) are recorded on the memory card while motion video is recorded on the tape. (Simultaneous recording) 5-5-2 Card mode Still images (progressive photo images: JPEG) or motion video (Motion- JPEG 15 (12.5) frames/ sec audio (monaural)) can be recorded on SD memory card (or MultiMediaCard). Refer to the memory card system on page 27. Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Spotlight mode, Surf (Sand) & Snow mode, Low Light mode, Night mode, Night+ mode, Super Night mode (Night+, Super Night mode are for MVX250i E only)
5-6 Exposure control 5-6-1 Program AE
22

5-6-2 AE photometric system Tape recording
Card recording
Center- bottom- weighted average : Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Low Light mode, Night mode, Night+ mode, Super Night mode (Night+ mode and Super Night mode are for MVX250i E only) All area average photometry + 128-segment (16H 8V) evaluative photometry : Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode Evaluative photometry (128- segment): Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Low Light mode, Night mode, Night+ mode and Super Night mode (Night+ mode and Super Night mode are available in MVX250i E only.) All area average photometry + 128- segment evaluative photometry : Spotlight mode, Surf (Sand) &Snow mode AE is locked by pressing the EXP lock button. After the AE is locked, the exposure level can be corrected using the SET button (except in Full Auto mode). 11 levels(11 to 0 to +11). Indicated as number in the viewfinder (EXP lock 0). <Tape mode> Auto : 1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON) 1/50 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF) Select : 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 or 1/2000 sec. <Card mode> Auto : 1/12.5 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter ON) 1/25 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF) Select : 1/50, 1/120 or 1/250 sec. 1/12.5 (fixed speed) 1/6 sec to 1/500 sec (same for Night+, Super Night modes of MVX250i E) 1/2 sec to 1/250 sec (same for Night+, Super Night modes of MVX250i E) TTLvideo signal sensing Screen center One of 3 locations on screen selected (screen center only in full auto mode) None Supported (During focus priority : User can select desired frame (green) from one of the 3- point range finding frame display. Screen center only during Full Auto mode.) 10 mm to infinite (at wide end) ; 1 mm to infinite in full zoom area from lens front Approx. 50 lx - 100,000 lx Continuous AF / manual focus / infinite focus. AF ON/OFF switching is possible in all but Full Auto mode (operation by pressing focus button). During manual focus (AF OFF), the MF indicator appears in the viewfinder. The shooting distance can be forced to infinity by holding down the focus button in the auto focus mode. 0.33-inch Color LCD (approx. 113,000 pixels). ON when LCD monitor closed (panel facing inwards) and during mirror shooting Possible (70 deg. upward to support low-angle shooting) Possible +1.0 to 5.0 diopter (when eye is at eyepiece) Two elements in two groups 2.5-inch Color LCD Approx. 123,000 pixels (560 (H) 220 (V)) TFT active matrix drive RGB delta arrangement; ON when LCD monitor not closed (panel facing inwards) Possible ; Monitoring is possible for high-angle, low-angle, and mirror shooting
5-6-3 Exposure correction function AE lock Exposure correction amount 5-6-4 Electronic shutter 5-6-4-1 In Auto mode
5-6-4-2 In Low Light mode 5-6-4-3 In Night mode Tape recording Card recording 5-7 AF (Auto Focus) 5-7-1 System 5-7-2 AF range finding area During Tape mode During Card mode 5-7-3 AF Range finding frame display During Tape mode During Card mode 5-7-4 AF operating range 5-7-5 AF operation illumination range 5-7-6 AF mode switching Manual focus Infinity focus 5-8 Viewfinder 5-8-1 Rotation 5-8-2 Detaching eyepiece 5-8-3 Diopter movement range 5-8-4 Lens configuration 5-9 LCD monitor 5-9-1 Angle adjustment
23

5-9-2 Information display Color display of operating mode, simple zoom position, remaining battery charge, remaining tape, time code, warnings and other indications. The indicators are not displayed during mirror shooting. 8 languages of Japanese, Chinese (simplified Chinese), English, German, French, Italian, Spanish and Russian supported. Relationship between LCD monitor and viewfinder Camera mode, Card / Camera mode LCD panel position Panel closed (panel facing inwards) Panel closed (panel facing outwards) Panel open Mirror shooting*2 LCD panel OFF ON ON ON*1 CVF ON OFF OFF ON VCR mode and Card Playback LCD panel OFF ON ON ON CVF ON OFF OFF OFF
*1 : Mirror mode possible by menu selection. *2 : During mirror mode, only or and the self-timer display appear.
5-10 White balance adjustment
TTL 128-segments, new white extraction system FAWB. Includes set / preset (outdoor: 5,600 k; indoor: 3,200 k) (selected from camera menu).
5-10-1 Adjustment range 5-11 Digital feature functions
2,800 k to 8,000 k The following modes are provided : Fader, Effects, Multi-screen Fader : Linked to Start/Stop button. Can be used 1 time when Fade mode displayed. (Mode indication goes out when Fader ends.) Effects : Effect continues until mode is turned OFF. Multi-screen : Loads and displays multiple screens at set interval or manually. Displayed until mode is turned OFF. Card mix : Mixes and displays included sample images, images recorded on cards and motion video. 5-11-1 Fader Audio synchronized fader (Only in recording on tape) Auto Fade (Japanese model : Fade to white, Overseas model: Fade to black), Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide 5-11-1-1 Fade time Approx. 4 sec 5-11-2 Effects Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror (Only Black and White is available during card recording) Effect function turned ON / OFF from D. Effect button. Toggle operation 5-11-3 Multi-screen (tape recording only ; excludes Night mode) 5-11-3-1 Number of screens 4 (2 2), 9 (3 3), 16 (4 4) 5-11-3-2 Operation mode Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames) During Low Light mode, the settings are Fast (4 frames), Normal (8 frames), and Slow (12 frames) 5-12 Card Mix 5-12-1 Mix type Card Chroma Key, Card Lumi. Key, Camera Chroma Key, Card Animation 5-12-2 Mix level adjustment Possible. 32 levels 5-12-3 Animation type 3 types : Corner Animation, Straight Animation or Random Animation (Animation Titles are already recorded in the supplied SD Memory Card SDC-8M.) 5-12-4 Availability in operation mode Camera Card (Still Image) Fader Effect Multi-screen Card Mix Card (Motion Video) Tape (Still Image) Tape (Motion Video)
Black and White only Black and White only
24

5-13 Built-in microphone 5-13-1 Wind screen function Stereo using electret condenser microphone Supported ; AUTO or OFF can be selected (Selected from menu. However, built-in microphone only.) 5-14 Auxiliary light (MVX250i E, MVX250i E only) Equipped with white LED 5-14-1 Lighting mode Night+ mode : LED is forcibly lighted. Super Night mode : LED lights depending on brightness of the subject. 5-15 Other additional functions 5-15-1 Time code Displays recording time (0:00:00 to 7:59:59) and records in sub-code area. 5-15-2 Data code The date and camera information during recording are automatically recorded and can be displayed during playback. a. Time and date Automatic calendar range: January 1, 2004 through December 31, 2030 (the initial setting is January 1, 2004) One of the following three formats can be selected for the date / time display.
b. Camera data 5-15-3 Accessory shoe 5-15-4 REC Search mechanism 5-15-5 REC Review 5-15-6 Zero Set Memory
World clock capability (select the name of your destination city and the date and time are automatically adjusted to the local date and time.) Supports daylight savings time. During playback, time can be displayed in three different modes (date only, time and date, or time only). (Time and date can be displayed for January 1, 1990 through December 31, 2089.) Shutter speed and aperture value information are recorded (but not displayed during recording), and can be displayed during playback. Supported. Advanced accessory shoe supported (MVX250i E only) Supported. Tape can be played (forward or reverse) by pressing the REC Search button while camera recording is paused. (When REC Search ends, camera recording is paused again.) Supported. Accessed by operating the Recording Check button when camera recording is paused (in Tape mode only). Supported. This function allows you to rewind or fast-forward the tape to the position where the WL-D83 Zero Set Memory key is pressed (the counter value is set to 0:00:00). (During record-
ing, only zero setting is allowed. This function can be used in Playback mode.) M display appears at the far right of the counter. 5-15-7 Remote control reception ON/OFF Possible. This can be done in Camera mode and VCR mode (by selecting from menu). 5-15-8 Headphone volume adjustment Possible. Adjustable with SET button 5-15-9 16:9 shooting High- resolution 16: 9 (CCD extraction equivalent to approx. 790,000 pixels when image stabilizer is ON or CCD extraction equivalent to approx. 920,000 pixels when image stabilizer is OFF). If 16: 9 mode is selected, the screen switches to a letterbox display (with black bands (masked) at the top and bottom)). In Tape mode only 5-15-10 AEB shooting Included. (First shot : No correction, Second shot : -0.5 level, Third shot : +0.5 level) 5-15-11 Skin detail mode When skin areas are detected, they are expressed softly, and the small blemishes, lines, etc. become unnoticeable. ON or OFF setting possible. 5-15-12 Still image check time setting The time used for checking still images can be set after the photo button is pressed and its operation is released. One of 6 settings; OFF (0 sec), 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 seconds can be selected as the setting mode. 6 Recorder 6-1 Recording functions Camera shooting and recording, DV input recording**, analog input recording ** : MVX250i E, MVX200i E only 6-1-1 Recording format Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs) 6-1-2 Tape speed Approx. 18.83 mm / second (in SP mode), approx. 12.57 mm / second (in LP mode) 6-1-3 DV input recording Complies with IEEE1394. Records video / audio signals from a digital video camera connected through a DV cable. 6-1-4 Analog input recording Records analog video / audio signals using an S-Video terminal or AV terminal. (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only) 6-1-5 Priority of terminals during recording DV terminal > S-Video terminal > AV terminal (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only) 6-2 Audio Dubbing Recording Possible. (SD spec tapes only) 6-2-1 Insert-capable tape Only tapes with 12- bit/ SP recording (other than 4- channel simultaneous recording) can be used in Audio Dubbing Recording.
25

6-2-2 Audio Dubbing signal input Audio signal from LINE (AV terminal) or microphone (external > internal). MVX200i E has no external microphone terminal. MVX200 E has no external microphone terminal and line in function. Press audio dubbing button on remote control while playback is paused. Standard Playback and Superb Playback Video recorded in SP and LP modes Supports the following sampling frequencies : 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz. Sampling frequency : 32 kHz Stereo 1, Stereo 2, or mixed playback of Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 (variable mix ratio) Plays video only Pure frame playback Approx. 11.5 speed. Approx. 11.5 speed. Forward/reverse frame feeding Forward/reverse 1/3 speed Forward/reverse 1 speed Forward/reverse 2 speed Approx. 2 minutes and 20 seconds (using 60-minute tape) If there is more than one recording date, this function cue up to the position where the date changes. Forward/reverse date search (use the / keys on the remote control after selecting Date search with the remote control Search Select key) 6-5-4 Index search 6-5-5 End search Search can be set for up to 10 images before or after the current position. None When a tape is played back upon completion of the shooting, this function transports the tape to the position where the shooting last ended, it cues to the end of the shooting on the tape, and then places the tape in the stop mode. Furthermore, when an end search is being performed, the tape is played back starting about 4 seconds before the end of the shooting, enabling the image immediately before the end to be checked. However, this function does not work when the tape has been removed after shooting. SD format signals complying with IEEE1394 AV / C protocol (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only) (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only) PAL standard color video signals 75 1Vp-p (composite) Stereo audio signals Min. 40 k 10dBv (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only) PAL Y/C separated video signal 75 0.3Vp-p (color burst signal) Included. (MVX250i E only) Supports USB 2.0 FullSpeed class. SD format signals complying with IEEE1394-AV/C protocol
6-2-3 Switching to Audio Dubbing 6-3 Playback functions 6-3-1 Standard Playback a. Video b. Audio 16-bit 12-bit 6-3-2 Special Playback a. Still image playback b. Fast-forward playback c. Rewind playback d. Frame playback e. Slow playback f. 1 SP playback g. 2 SP playback 6-4 Tape fast-forward / rewind time 6-5 Search 6-5-1 Date search
6-6 Input signals 6-6-1 DV terminal 6-6-2 AV terminal a. Video signals Types of signals Impedance Signal level b. Audio signals Types of signals Impedance Signal level 6-6-3 S Video terminal Signal configuration Impedance Signal level 6-6-4 Microphone terminal 6-6-5 USB terminal 6-7 Output signals (MVX250i E only) 6-7-1 DV terminal 6-7-2 AV terminal a. Video signals Types of signals Impedance Signal level Horizontal resolution Self-recording/playback Camera EE OUT
PAL standard color video signals 75 1 Vp-p (composite) Approx. 530 TV lines (screen center) Max. approx. 530 TV lines (screen center)
26

b. Audio signals Types of signals Impedance Signal level Frequency characteristic Audio signal S/N Built-in microphone input External microphone input 6-7-3 S-Video terminal Signal configuration Video signals Color signal Impedance Signal level Brightness signal S/N Horizontal resolution Self recording / playback Camera EE OUT 6-7-4 Headphone terminal Output impedance Signal level 6-7-5 USB terminal USB device class Compatible computer systems PC operating system 6-8 Memory card system 6-8-1 Types of memory cards used 6-8-2 Recordable image types a. Still image In Camera mode
Stereo audio signal Max. 3 k 10 dBv 60 Hz to 16 kHz (Range between 1 kHz standard 3 dB) Min. 48 dB Min. 48 dB (However, the MVX200i E, MVX200 E model does not have an external microphone input terminal.) PAL Y/C separated video signal 1 Vp-p (brightness + synchronization signal) 0.3 Vp-p (Color burst signal) 75 0.3 Vp-p (Color burst signal) Min. 45 dB Conforms to camera EE OUT Max. approx. 530 TV lines (screen center) 3.5 mm stereo mini jack 100 25 dBv (with 16 load at maximum volume) Supports USB2.0 FullSpeed class Independent class, PTP class, mass storage class, audio class, video class Windows : IBM PC/AT compatible, NEC PC98-NX Series Macintosh : Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBook Windows : Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP Macintosh : Mac OS 9 or later SD memory card, Multimedia card JPEG recording
] Fine], or [ ] Normal] is selected for [PHOTO REC] on the [CAM SET UP] When [ menu, still images can be recorded on the memory card by operating the photo button while motion video is being recorded on the tape. (Tape simultaneous recording function: VGA still images) In Card Recording mode Still image is recorded using the Photo button (image size and image quality are selectable). Writing in Progress warning is displayed in the EVF/ LCD. During playback mode Still image is recorded using the photo button during tape playback (pressed halfway down for still image playback and pressed all the way down for recording). (VGA still images) Also, DV input images (when no tape loaded or loaded tape is stopped) can be recorded by pressing the photo button (pressing halfway captures still image of the DV input, pressing all the way down records the image). b. Motion video AVI (Video data: Motion JPEG / Audio data: WAVE (monoaural)) Records only camera images during Card Record mode and from tape during VCR mode (recording from DV input, AV input and S- Video input are disabled). Image quality in recording onto card from tape / DV input Source Tape / DV input Tape / DV input Analog AV input Source recording system Progressive or frame motion video recording Normal motion video recording Normal motion video recording Image recorded on card Progressive or frame image Simple pure frame image Field image
27

6-8-3 File names/folder names Based on the DCF (Design rule for Camera File systems) and still image (Exif 2.2) file management specifications / DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) file management specifications, the following names are assigned to recorded cards after formatting in the Format menu. CANON DV Types of files Still image (Exif 2.2) file Motion video file Motion video thumbnail file (*1) Photo stitch Zoom browser DPOF file Work file Compression system JPEG Motion JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG TEXT TEXT Folder name and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/IMG_yyyy.JPG //DCIM/xxxCANON/MVIyyyy.AVI //DCIM/xxxCANON/MVIyyyy.THM //DCIM/xxxCANON/STz_yyyy.JPG //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG //MISC/AUTPRINT.MRK //DCIM/CANONMSC/xxx.tmp
a. Card volume label
xxx : Folder No., yyyy : File number, z : A to Z (*1) Comes from motion video file of same File No. DCF folder and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG xxx : folder No., yyyy : file No. b. File number Files are managed internally by folder No. and file No. Photographed images are assigned file numbers from 0001 to 9900, and are stored in folders (100 files to a folder). Each folder is assigned numbers 100 to 998. Relationship between folder No. and file No. Folder No. 100 101 102 198 200 998 9801 9802 9803 9899 9900 Photographed images start from 101-0101, and are basically numbered to be greater than Directory No.- File No. of files saved on MultiMediaCards. 6-8-4 Recorded image size/image quality a. Still image recording In tape simultaneous recording 640 480 dots(VGA) / Switchable between Fine and Normal In card / camera mode 1280 960 dots (XGA), 640 480 dots (VGA) / Switchable between Super Fine, Fine, and Normal During tape playback, line input, and card recording of DV input image 640 480 dots (VGA) / Switchable between Super Fine, Fine, and Normal b. Motion video recording (Motion JPEG) 320 240, 160 120 dots 12.5 frames / sec 9801 9802 9803 9899 9900 0001 0002 0003 0099 0100 Photographed image recording area File No. 0001 0002 0003 0099 0100 0101 0102 0103 0199 0200 0201 0202 0203 0299 0300 Saved files Sample image included at time of shipping
28

6-8-5 Number of recorded images / recording time SDC-8M a. Still image recording Super Fine 1280 960dots (SXGA) Approx. 6 images (approx. 850 KB per image) Fine Approx. 10 images (approx. 550 KB per image) Normal Approx. 18 images (approx. 300 KB per image) b. Motion video recording Maximum recording time Data size per second 320 240dots Approx. 20 sec Approx. 250 KB / sec 640 480dots (VGA) Approx. 34 images SDC-128M 1280 960dots (SXGA) 640 480dots (VGA) Approx. 144 images Approx. 709 images
(approx. 175 KB per image) (approx. 850 KB per image) (approx. 175 KB per image) Approx. 50 images Approx. 222 images Approx. 975 images
(approx. 120 KB per image) (approx. 550 KB per image) (approx. 120 KB per image) Approx. 84 images (approx. 65 KB per image) 160 120 dots Approx. 50 sec Approx. 120 KB / sec Approx. 409 images 320 240 dots Approx. 8 minutes Approx. 250 KB / sec Approx. 1560 images 160 120 dots Approx. 17 minutes Approx. 120 KB / sec
(approx. 300 KB per image) (approx. 65 KB per image)
SDC-512M a. Still image recording Super Fine 1280 960dots (SXGA) Approx. 577 images (approx. 850 KB per image) Fine Approx. 891 images (approx. 550KB per image) Normal Approx. 1641 images (approx. 300 KB per image) b. Motion video recording Maximum recording time Data size per second 320 240dots Approx. 33 minutes Approx. 250 KB / sec 640 480dots (VGA) Approx. 2837 images (approx. 175 KB per image) Approx. 3902 images (approx. 120KB per image) Approx. 6243 images (approx. 65 KB per image) 160 120 dots Approx. 69 minutes Approx. 120 KB / sec
When a MultiMediaCard is used, the maximum recording time per shot is about 10 sec (for 320 240) or about 30 sec (for 160 120). * The included SDC-8M contains prerecorded title images, therefore the actual number of recorded images will be less than above. * The given number of recorded images is only for reference. The number will vary greatly depending on the focal length, subject and other conditions when taking pictures. * Windows XP : To connect the ELURA70 / 65 / 60A to a computer, the maximum continuous recording time of movies on a memory card should be no longer than Approx. 12 minutes in 320 240 and 35 minutes in 160 120.
29

6-8-6 Continuous shooting Number of recorded images in continuous shooting Fast frame feeding (5 frames / sec; 2 frames / sec when using flash) Size Image quality Super Fine Fine 1280 960 Normal Super Fine Fine Normal Super Fine Fine 640 480 Normal Super Fine Fine Normal When flash is used When not installed (When flash is not used) When flash is used VFL-1 When not installed (When flash is not used) Continuous images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Maximum flash emission is 1/4 of single shot flash Maximum flash emission is 1/4 of single shot flash Remarks
Normal frame feeding (3 frames / sec; 2 frames / sec when using flash) Size Image quality Super Fine Fine 1280 960 Normal Super Fine Fine Normal Super Fine Fine 640 480 Normal Super Fine Fine Normal When flash is used When not installed (When flash is not used) When flash is used VFL-1 When not installed (When flash is not used) Continuous images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 10 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Up to 60 images Maximum flash emission is 1/4 of single shot flash Maximum flash emission is 1/4 of single shot flash Remarks
30

6-8-7 Card format 6-8-8 Usable memory card SD memory card Formats using format command in the main unit menu. Operation is not guaranteed with PC formats as problems can occur with some OS. San Disk : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB Matsushita Electric : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB Toshiba : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB San Disk : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB Hitachi : 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB (However, this does not mean that the operation of all these memory cards is guaranteed.) The following modes are provided : Fader, Effect, Multi-screen. Can be executed once when Fader mode is displayed in conjunction with pressing the button (the mode display disappears when Fader ends). Effects : Effect continues until mode is turned OFF. Multi-screen : Loads and displays multiple screens at set interval or manually. Displayed until mode is turned OFF. Audio synchronized Fader Same as in recording mode. Auto Fade (Japanese model: Fade to white, Overseas model : Fade to black), Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide Approx. 4 sec Same as in recording mode. Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror (only in Tape mode) Effect function turned ON / OFF from D. Effect button. Toggle operation 4 (2 2), 9 (3 3), 16 (4 4) Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames) Not available Playback (VCR / Tape) Fader Effects Multi-screen Card Mix 6-10 Direct print Card playback
MultiMediaCard
6-9
Digital feature playback function
6-9-1 Fader
Fade time 6-9-2 Effects
6-9-3 Multi-screen a. Number of screens b. Screen capture speed 6-9-4 Card mix 6-9-5 Availability in operation modes
6-10-1 Printable images 6-10-2 Print format 6-10-3 Trimming 6-10-4 Date printing 6-10-5 Number of print copies
Still images recorded on memory cards can be easily printed by connecting to (sold separately) card photo printers CP-200/300, Camera Direct Printer compatible BJ printers PIXUS 470PD/ JP450i with supplied IFC-300PCU interface cable. DPOF print setup support (max. 200images) Only the still images which have been recorded on the SD memory cards or MultiMediaCards. Single image/8-image print (layout of 8 pictures of same image : only when the card size paper tray has been installed in the CP200/300). Printing not available from index screen. Possible Possible (when connected to PictBridge compatible printer except for the CP-200/CP-300.) Easy Print : 1 to 99 sheets DPOF printing : Max. 200 images, 1 to 99 each
31

6-10-6 Print systems
Print manufacturer Printer specifications CP specifications
Canon CP specifications + PictBridge specifications CP-200/300 BJ Photo specifications only BJ-895PD/ 535PD/F890PD, PIXUS 50i BJ Photo specifications + PictBridge specifications PIXUS 990i, 900PD
Other manufacturer PictBridge specifications only
Suitable printer Printer specifications when connected to MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E (Controlled at printer side)
CP-10/100
CP camera direct specifications
PictBridge specifications
BJ camera direc specifications
CP camera direct control When the printer is connected
PictBridge control
BJ camera direct control
PictBridge control
PictBridge control
DPOF printing screen
Paper setting Paper size Paper type Borders/ no borders 8-of-1 screen layout Sectional printing Image optimizing Date printing Trimming (Area selection) (When card size paper is used) (When card size paper is used)
Printing functions
): When the printer is supported
32

6-11 Other 6-11-1 Consecutive shooting mechanism Can be used starting in Recording Pause or Stop mode, or starting with the power off. This does not apply to cases where the cassette has been removed. 6-11-2 Automatic stop function When forward still image playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes, or reverse still image playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes. When a condensation warning is displayed. When the tape end or beginning is reached. 6-11-3 Power automatic stop function When Recording Pause continues for approx. 5 min. When the battery voltage falls below a specified value. 6-11-4 Time code Automatically written during recording. Time code values range from 0:00:00:00 to 7:59:59:24 (hours:minutes:seconds:frames). 6-11-5 World clock display Set reference city (city of time clock setting) and select name of city when shooting. Date and time are automatically adjusted to local date and time, and recorded in data code. 6-11-6 Speaker Built-in, volume control provided 6-11-7 File transfer a. USB file transfer Still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion JPEG files) recorded on memory cards can be uploaded to a PC and still images (JPEG files) on the PC can be downloaded to memory cards in the camcorder by connecting the included IFC-300PCU interface cable between a USB port on the PC and the USB port of the camcorder. b. DV file transfer Still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion JPEG files) recorded on memory cards can be uploaded to a PC and still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion JPEG files) on the PC can be downloaded to memory cards in the camcorder by connecting a CV-150F (or CV250F) DV cable between an IEEE1394 port on the PC and the DV terminal of the camcorder. 6-11-8 Analog / Digital conversion (PAL models excluded) Converts analog AV signals input to the AV terminal into digital DV signals in real-time and outputs the digital DV signals from the DV terminal. When an 8 mm video player or VHS video player is connected with the camcorder using an AV cable, and the camcorder is connected to a PC using a DV cable, playback images can be transferred from the 8 mm tape or VHS tape to the PC. (Under the VCR settings on the VCR menu screen, set AV input DV output to ON.) If the zoom lever is flipped to the tele side during image playback from the tape or card (MVX250i E only, except for motion video), the image being played back can be enlarged to 5 times its size. When the zoom lever is flipped to the wide side, the enlarged image is returned to its original size. Position of the enlarged section during enlarged screen view can be changed by SET button. (On the LCD monitor, a frame is displayed to show the zoom-in area, and the direction in which the area can be moved by the SET button is indicated by / .) Toggling between the up/down and left/right movement direction settings is performed by pressing the SET button. (Left / right is the default setting when the mode is transferred to zoom-in.)
6-11-9 Playback zoom
6-11-10 Battery charging function
When the CA-570 Canon compact power adapter is connected, the battery pack installed in the battery pack compartment can be charged. (During charging, the charge lamp flashes (one flash with a charge level of 0% to 50%, and two flashes with a charge level of more than 50%) or it lights (when the charging is complete with a charge level of 97% or more)). NB-2L : Approx. 110 min., NB-2LH : Approx. 115 min., BP-2L12 : Approx. 180 min., BP-2L14 : Approx. 210 min. If the photo button is pressed while motion video is recorded to tape, still images (image size : 640 480, image quality : Selectable from Fine or Normal) can be recorded on the memory card. Support for advanced accessory shoe (MVX250i E model), No support for advanced accessory shoe (MVX200i E, MVX200 E model) None
Charging time (when power switch is at OFF) 6-11-11 Simultaneous still image recording 6-11-12 Accessory shoe 6-11-13 Recording lamp
33

6-12 Terminal 6-12-1 DV terminal 6-12-2 S-Video terminal 6-12-3 AV (Audio / Video) terminal 6-12-4 External microphone input terminal 6-12-5 Headphone terminal 6-12-6 Memory card connection terminal 6-12-7 Battery terminal 6-12-8 DC IN terminal 6-12-9 USB terminal 7 Power supply 7-1 Input power supply 7-2 Power consumption 8 Dimensions (W H D) 9 Weight 9-1 Body 9-2 Total equipped weight
Special 4-pin (IEEE1394 compatible) ; input and output (MVX200i E, MVX200 E model has output only.) 4-pin mini-DIN ; input and output 3.5 mm 4-pole pin jack (yellow) ; input / output (output only on MVX200i E, MVX200 E model) ; Also serves as headphone terminal Included (However, except for MVX200i E, MVX200 E model) 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack (also serves as AV terminal) Special multi-pin Special 3-pin 3.4 mm jack (for connecting CA-570) 5-pin (mini-B Receptacle) 7.4V DC (battery pack), 8.4V DC (DC IN). During recording : Approx. 2.6 W (using EVF) ; Approx. 3.3 W (using LCD monitor) During playback : Approx. 2.8 W (using LCD monitor) Approx. 74 78 130 mm (2.9 3.1 5.1 in) (Protrusions excluded) Approx. 79 78 130 mm (3.1 3.1 5.1 in) (Maximum width with protrusious) MVX250i E : Approx. 500 g (1.1 lb) MVX200i E, MVX200 E : Approx. 500 g (1.1 lb) MVX250i E : Approx. 560 g (1.2 lb) MVX200i E, MVX200 E : Approx. 560 g (1.2 lb) (Including NB-2LH, DVM-E30, lens cap, lithium coin battery, and SDC-8M) MVX250i E : Approx. 600 g (1.3 lb) (Including BP-2L14, DVM-E30, lens cap, lithium coin battery, and SDC-8M)
10 Temperature and humidity requirements 10-1 Temperature and humidity requirements for performance 0 to 40C, 85% (relative humidity) 10-2 Temperature and humidity requirements for operation 5 to 40C, 65% (relative humidity)
34
4. System Diagram (Common to all Models)
WS-20 Wrist Strap
SS-900 Shoulder Strap
CBC-NB2 Car Battery Charger
WD-H34 Wide-converter
MiniDV Video Cassette WL-D83 Wireless Controller

CB-2LTE Battery Charger
NB-2L, NB-2LH, BP-2L12, BP-2L14 Battery Pack
TL-H34 Tele-converter
CA-570 Compact Power Adapter
FS-34U Filter Set
NB-2L, NB-2LH, BP-2L12, BP-2L14
Battery Pack S-150 S-video Cable

PC-A10 SCART Adapter
VFL-1 Video Flash Light STV-250N Stereo Video Cable
TV
VCR VL-3 Video Light CV-150F/CV-250F DV Cable
Digital Device
DM-50 Directional Stereo Microphone Stereo Microphone (commercially available)
SDC-128M SD Memory Card
PC Card Adapter USB Reader/Writer
MultiMediaCard IFC-300PCU USB Cable Computer
BP-900 Series Battery Pack
VL-10Li Battery Video Light
Canon printers with direct print function / PictBridge-compliant printers SC-2000 Soft Carrying Case
Fig. 2
35
5. Overview of viewfinder / LCD panel displays

5-1 Camera mode
MENU INDICATION Camera mode PAL MODEL REMARKS
Zoom / Exposure correction bar display (displayed for approx. four seconds after zoom operation) Zoom bar display Optical Zoom 72 digital zoom 360 digital zoom Zooming is stopped Zooming to telephoto end Zooming to wide end
W T
W
W W T
T
T
MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56 MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 280
W W
T T
Exposure correction bar display Minimum correction : -11 level
Correction default setting
Maximum correction : +11 level Displayed by correctable range
During Full Auto
No display
Image stabilizer display The image stabilizer is ON The image stabilizer is OFF No display
Recording mode display SP recording LP recording
36
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Operating mode display Recording Recording Pause Playback is stopped Cassette is ejected + REC Search - REC Search PAL MODEL REMARKS
Program AE mode display Full Auto mode is selected Auto mode is selected
A
Always displayed Displayed for approx. 4 seconds and then turns OFF.
Sports mode is selected Portrait mode is selected Spotlight mode is selected Surf & Snow mode is selected Low Light mode is selected Night mode is selected Night+ mode is selected* Super Night mode is selected* MVX250i E only MVX250i E only After displayed for approx. 4 seconds, only characters are displayed.
Program AE mode menu

A
Skin detail mode display Skin detail mode is selected Skin detail mode is not selected No display
Tape counter display Time code display
Not entered Zero Set Memory

M
Not entered
37
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION EXP lock display Minimum exposure compensation value PAL MODEL REMARKS
Default setting
Maximum exposure value During Full Auto No display
Tape information display Remaining tape display
Tape end Not entered Tape warning display Other No display flashes
Shutter speed display 1/50 sec is selected 1/120 sec is selected 1/250 sec is selected 1/500 sec is selected 1/1000 sec is selected 1/2000 sec is selected
When Auto mode is selected
Timer display During recording
Self-timer is activated
Mirror shooting
Displays large in screen center. Displayed with right and left sides reversed when Mirror is set to ON.
38
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Remaining battery level display PAL MODEL REMARKS Approx. 100% remaining Approx. 75% remaining Approx. 50% remaining Approx. 25% remaining Approx. 0% remaining, warning display (flashes red) Power adapter is attached No display
Focus mode display AF is set to OFF AF is set to ON Set to infinity No display
Lithium coin battery warning
flashes red
Condensation warning display
flashes red
White balance display Set Indoor preset Outdoor preset Auto No display
Remote control code display Code setting 1 is selected Code setting 2 is selected Remote controller receive OFF is selected
Card Mix display
Headphone volume display When volume is adjusted
When volume is at off
39
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Digital feature display Auto Fade is selected Wipe is selected Corner Wipe is selected Jump is selected Flip is selected Puzzle is selected Zigzag is selected Beam is selected Tide is selected Art is selected Black and White is selected Sepia is selected Mosaic is selected Ball is selected Cube is selected Wave is selected Color Mask is selected Mirror is selected Multi-screen is selected Digital feature are turned OFF No display PAL MODEL REMARKS
Digital feature menu
40
Digital feature selection

Press the DIGITAL EFFECT button. The line where the cursor is located in the menu is displayed with a turquoise background. The previously selected items and the corresponding settings are shown in yellow.
OFF
In Fader Selection
In Effect Selection
In Multi Screen Selection
In Multi Screen Speed Selection
In Multi Screen Count Selection
41
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Wind screen display Auto Wind Screen is turned ON Auto Wind Screen is turned OFF No display PAL MODEL REMARKS
Area Summer Time display Area Summer Time display
Time and date is not set
* The desired style can be selected from among the styles shown above.
Flash display When Auto Flash is selected When Red-eye Reduction Auto Flash is selected When Flash On is selected When Flash Off is selected
(activated when VFL-1 is attached)
Audio mode display 12-bit 16-bit
16:9 mode display When 16:9 shooting is selected when it is not selected No display
Photo half-pressed lock display AF / AE operation in progress After AF / AE lock flashes green light
Advanced shoe information When a valid connection is made to DM-50, VFL-1, or VL-3 When accessory is not connected No display
C
Card information display When OFF is selected in still image recording When Fine When Normal is selected is selected No display
42
5-2 VCR mode

MENU INDICATION VCR mode PAL MODEL REMARKS
Audio 12-bit output display When 12-bit Stereo 1 is selected When 12-bit Stereo 2 is selected When 12-bit mixed 1:1 is selected When 12-bit mixed variable is selected 16-bit No display
Mix balance display Mix ratio 1:0 Mix ratio 1:1 Mix ratio 0:1
Recording mode display SD mode SP recording LP recording
Operating mode display During recording During recording pause Cassette is ejected Playback is stopped Playback Fast forward Rewind No tape Fast playback 2 speed playback 1 speed playback Slow playback Frame playback Still image playback Still image reverse playback Red display
43
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Frame reverse playback Slow reverse playback 1 SP reverse playback 2 SP reverse playback Rewind playback Forward date search PAL MODEL REMARKS
Reverse date search
FF return REW return Audio dubbing pause Audio dubbing recording
Tape counter Time code display
Not entered
Zero Set Memory
Same as during Camera mode
Remaining tape display
Audio dubbing / search operation display Audio dubbing is selected Data search operation When end search is selected Other than search No display
Remaining battery level display
Same as during camera mode
Lithium coin battery Warning display
Condensation warning display
Remote control code display
Digital feature display
44
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Speaker / Headphone volume adjustment display When Speaker is selected PAL MODEL REMARKS
When volume is at OFF When Headphone is selected Same as during camera mode
Wind screen display
Data code display
Data code settings Time and date Date setting Camera data Date and time & camera data
Date and time selection

Camera data Aperture value display
Time setting Date & time settings
This products aperture value is from F1.8
Aperture fully close
There is no Aperture Fully Close function in this product
Not entered
Shutter speed display
This products shutter speed is 1/2 sec to 1/2000 sec
Not entered
45
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Time display Time setting is selected PAL MODEL REMARKS
Not entered Time and time setting are selected
Not entered
Data display
Not entered
Audio mode display Audio mode display Audio input display Audio input terminal is selected Microphone terminal is selected Same as during camera mode
16:9 mode display 16:9 tape playback Normal tape play back No display
Advanced shoe information When a valid connection is made to DM-50, VFL-1, or VL-3 When accessory is not connected DV input display AV Other DV signal conversion is selected No display No display
C
Playback zoom display
46
5-3 Card / Camera mode

MENU INDICATION Card/Camera mode PAL MODEL REMARKS
Zoom/Exposure correction display Zoom/Exposure correction display Same as Camera mode (except that Digital zoom is 72/64/56 only) Over exposure warning (flashes) Caution is indicated when F11 or higher
Continuous shot / AEB mode display When Continuous Shooting mode is selected When fast continuous shot mode is selected When AEB mode is selected When Single Shot mode is selected No display
Card recording quality display
Program AE mode display
Skin detail mode display
Stitch Assist quantity display
Clockwise Counter-clockwise
Image stabilizer warning display
Displayed when the shutter speed is 1/60 second or less Writing and reading
Card access display
47
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Card remaining display No card (flashes red) 9999 or more images can be recorded PAL MODEL REMARKS
99 images can be recorded
5 images can be recorded Yellow display 1 image scan be recorded
EXP lock display
Same as during Camera/Tape mode
Self-timer display
Still image size display 1280 768 is selected 640 480 is selected Motion video size display 320 240 is selected 160 120 is selected Shutter speed display
Focus mode display
Remaining battery level display
White balance display
AF frame display AF priority Center only during green mode After three seconds, the green display section only appears white.
48
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Lithium coin battery low power warning display Condensation warning display Same as during Camera mode PAL MODEL Same as during Camera mode REMARKS
Remote control code display
Same as during Camera mode Black and White only
Digital feature display
Wind screen display
Area Summer Time display
Time and date display
Same as during Camera mode (date and time only)
Flash display
Photo half-pressed lock display
Advanced shoe information
Motion video available recording time display
hour : minutes
Headphone volume adjustment display
Photo half-pressed lock display
Stitch Assist operation guide
49
5-4 Card Playback mode

5-4-1 Still image Playback
MENU INDICATION Card Playback mode (Still images) PAL MODEL REMARKS
Title display Slide show Card playback
Send designation mark display
Print mark display
Protect mark display
DCF file name display Directory number-File number
PC USB connection display When not connected No display
Card access display
Image number display No card Checking number of images recorded on card 0 recorded images Red flashing display
9th of 99 recorded images
50
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Data code display PAL MODEL Same as during VCR mode (date and time only) REMARKS
Playback zoom operation guide display Same as during VCR playback mode
Slideshow operation guide display
5-4-2 Motion video (Motion JPEG) Playback

Motion video (Motion JPEG)
Card information display No card Checking number of images recorded on card 0 recorded images Red flashing display
Motion video size display
Speaker/headphone volume adjustment Same as during VCR mode
Operating mode display Playback Playback pause
Data code display
Same as during VCR mode (date and time only)
Total playback time display
Lap time display
51
5-4-3 Direct printing

MENU INDICATION Card Playback mode (Direct printing) PAL MODEL REMARKS
Printer connected display CP Direct compatible printer PictBridge compatible printer Bubble Jet Direct compatible printer
SET
SET SET
52
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCTUCT
5-5 Menu Display

The menu display has Camera mode, VCR mode, Card/Camera mode, and Card Playback mode.
Camera Mode
MAIN MENU ITEM CARD MIX CAMERA SET UP
SUB MENU ITEM
SETTINGS
DEFAULT
BACKUP
Switches to Card mix selection screen SHUTTER AUTO 1/50 1/120 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 ON OFF OFF 72 / 64 / 56 360 / 320 / 280 ON OFF ON OFF AUTO SET INDOOR OUTDOOR AUTO RED-EYE FLASH ON FLASH OFF AUTO OFF
NIGHT NIGHT+ S.NIGHT
AUTO
Lithium battery
A. SL SHUTTER D. ZOOM *1
ON
Lithium battery Lithium battery
72 / 64 / 56 ON OFF AUTO Lithium battery Lithium battery Lithium battery
IMAGE STAB 16 : 9 WHIT BAL.
FLASH *2
AUTO
Lithium battery
AF AST LAMP *2 NIGHT MODE *3
AUTO
SKIN DETAIL PHOTO REC *2
SOFT NORMAL OFF FINE NORMAL
NORMAL
Reset by turning power off
Lithium battery
VCR SET UP
RETURN REC MODE AV/PHONES RETURN
SP LP AV PHONES
SP AV
53

MAIN MENU ITEM AUDIO SET UP SUB MENU ITEM WIND SCREEN AUDIO MODE VOLUME AUTO OFF 16 bit 12 bit SETTINGS AUTO 12 bit DEFAULT BACKUP Lithium battery Lithium battery Lithium battery
RETURN DISPLAY SET UP/ BRIGHTNESS Lithium battery
LCD MIRROR TV SCREEN D/T DISPLAY LANGUAGE
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF DEUTSCH ENGLISH ESPAOL FRANAIS ITALIANO PyCCK 2004. 1. 1 AM 12:00 JAN. 1, 2004 12:00 AM 1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM ON OFF
ON ON OFF ENGLISH
Lithium battery Lithium battery Lithium battery
DATE FORMAT
1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM
DEMO MODE RETURN WL. REMOTE
ON
Lithium battery
SYSTEM
Lithium battery OFF ON OFF
BEEP
ON
Lithium battery
54

MAIN MENU ITEM SYSTEM SUB MENU ITEM T. ZONE/DST SETTINGS LONDON LONDON PARIS PARIS CAIRO MOSCOW DUBAI KARACHI DACCA BANGKOK H.KONG TOKYO SYDNEY SOLOMON WELLGTN. SAMOA HONOLU. ANCHOR. L.A. DENVER CHICAGO N.Y. CARACAS RIO FERNAN. FERNAN. AZORES AZORES 1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM 31. DEC. 2030 11:59 PM MY CAMERA RETURN S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND DEFAULT Lithium battery PARIS DEFAULT BACKUP Lithium battery
D/TIME SEL
1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM
Lithium battery
SHTR SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
OPER. SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
SELF-T SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
RETURN CLOSE
*1: Model MVX250i E : 72 / 360, model MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56 / 280 *2: Models MVX250i E, when VFL-1 is attached *3: Models MVX250i E only
55
VCR Mode
MAIN MENU ITEM VCR SET UP SUB MENU ITEM REC MODE AV/PHONES AV DV OUT *1 SETTINGS SP LP AV PHONES ON OFF L/R L/L R/R AUDIO IN MIC. IN AUTO OFF 16bit 12bit STEREO1 STEREO2 MIX/FIXED MIX/VARI. SP AV OFF DEFAULT BACKUP Lithium battery Lithium battery Reset by turning power off Reset by turning power off Lithium battery Lithium battery Lithium battery Reset by turning power off
AUDIO SET UP
RETURN OUTPUT CH
L/R
AUDIO DUB. *1 WIND SCREEN AUDIO MODE 12bit AUDIO
AUDIO IN AUTO 12bit STEREO1
MIX BALANCE
Lithium battery
CARD SET UP *2
RETURN IMG QUALITY
MOVIE SIZE FILE NOS. RETURN DISPLAY SET UP/ BRIGHTNESS
SUPER FINE FINE NORMAL 320 240 160 120 RESET CONTINUOUS
FINE
Lithium battery
320 240 CONTINUOUS
Lithium battery
TV SCREEN DISPLAYS 6 SEC. DATE DATA CODE
D/TIME SEL.
ON OFF ON OFF <PLAYBK> ON OFF DATE/TIME CAMERA DATA CAM. & D/T DATE TIME DATE & TIME
ON ON OFF DATE/TIME
Lithium battery Lithium battery Lithium battery Lithium battery
DATE & TIME
Lithium battery
56

MAIN MENU ITEM DISPLAY SET UP/ SUB MENU ITEM LANGUAGE SETTINGS DEUTSCH ENGLISH ESPAOL FRANAIS ITALIANO PyCCK 2004. 1. 1 AM 12:00 JAN. 1, 2004 12:00 AM 1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM DEFAULT ENGLISH BACKUP
DATE FORMAT
1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM
SYSTEM
RETURN WL. REMOTE OFF ON OFF LONDON LONDON PARIS PARIS CAIRO MOSCOW DUBAI KARACHI DACCA BANGKOK H.KONG TOKYO SYDNEY SOLOMON WELLGTN. SAMOA HONOLU. ANCHOR. L.A. DENVER CHICAGO N.Y. CARACAS RIO FERNAN. FERNAN. AZORES AZORES JAN. 1, 2004 12:00 AM 31. DEC. 2030 11:59 PM RETURN
Lithium battery
BEEP T. ZONE/DST
ON PARIS
D/TIME SEL
1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM
Lithium battery
57

MAIN MENU ITEM MY CAMERA SUB MENU ITEM SHTR SOUND SETTINGS OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND DEFAULT DEFAULT BACKUP Lithium battery
S-UP SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
OPER. SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
SELF-T SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
RETURN CLOSE
*1 : Excluding model MVX200 E
58
Card / Camera Mode

MAIN MENU ITEM CAMERA SET UP SUB MENU ITEM SHUTTER SETTINGS AUTO 1/50 1/120 1/250 ON OFF OFF 72 / 64 / 56 AUTO SET INDOOR OUTDOOR AUTO RED-EYE FLASH ON FLASH OFF AUTO OFF ON OFF AUTO OFF
NIGHT NIGHT+ S.NIGHT
DEFAULT AUTO
BACKUP Lithium battery
A. SL SHUTTER D. ZOOM WHIT BAL.
ON OFF AUTO
FLASH *1
AUTO
Lithium battery
AF AST LAMP *1 FOCUS PRI. ND NIGHT MODE *2
AUTO ON AUTO
NIGHT+
Lithium battery Lithium battery Lithium battery Lithium battery
SKIN DETAIL REVIEW
SOFT NORMAL OFF 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec SUPER FINE FINE NORMAL 1280 960 640 480 320 240 160 120 RESET CONTINUOS AV PHONES ON OFF
NORMAL 2sec
Reset by turning power off Lithium battery
CARD SET UP
RETURN IMG QUALITY
FINE
Lithium battery
IMG SIZE MOVIE SIZE FILE NOS. RETURN AV/PHONES RETURN WIND SCREEN VOLUME
1280 960 320 240 CONTINUOS
VCR SET UP
AV
AUDIO SET UP
OFF
RETURN
59

MAIN MENU ITEM DISPLAY SET UP/ SUB MENU ITEM BRIGHTNESS SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP Lithium battery
LCD MIRROR TV SCREEN D/T DISPLAY LANGUAGE
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF DEUTSCH ENGLISH ESPAOL FRANAIS ITALIANO PyCCK 2004. 1. 1 AM 12:00 JAN. 1, 2004 12:00 AM 1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM ON OFF
ON ON OFF ENGLISH
DATE FORMAT
1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM
DEMO MODE RETURN WL. REMOTE
ON
Lithium battery
SYSTEM
Lithium battery OFF ON OFF
BEEP
ON
Lithium battery
60

MAIN MENU ITEM SYSTEM SUB MENU ITEM T. ZONE/DST SETTINGS LONDON LONDON PARIS PARIS CAIRO MOSCOW DUBAI KARACHI DACCA BANGKOK H.KONG TOKYO SYDNEY SOLOMON WELLGTN. SAMOA HONOLU. ANCHOR. L.A. DENVER CHICAGO N.Y. CARACAS RIO FERNAN. FERNAN. AZORES AZORES 1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM 31. DEC. 2030 11:59 PM MY CAMERA RETURN S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND DEFAULT Lithium battery PARIS DEFAULT BACKUP Lithium battery
D/TIME SEL
1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM
Lithium battery
SHTR SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
OPER. SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
SELF-T SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
RETURN CLOSE
*1 : Displayed only when VFL-1 is attached, Models MVX250i E only *2 : Models MVX250i E only
61
Card Playback Mode (Card/VCR mode)

MAIN MENU ITEM CARD OPERATIONS (for single screen) SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP
CARD OPERATIONS (for index screen)
PRINT ORDERS Switches to erase all print designations screen ALL ERASE TRANSFER ORDERS Switches to erase send designations screen ALL ERASE IMAGE ERASE CANCEL SINGLE ALL FORMAT CANCEL EXECUTE RETURN PROTECT Switches to image protect screen PRINT ORDER TRANSFER ORDER Switches to print designations screen Switches to send designations screen
None
None
VCR SET UP
RETURN AV/PHONES RETURN
AV PHONES
AV
DISPLAY SET UP/
BRIGHTNESS
Lithium battery
TV SCREEN DISPLAY D/TIME SEL.
LANGUAGE
ON OFF ON OFF <PLAYBK> DATE TIME DATE & TIME DEUTSCH ENGLISH ESPAOL FRANAIS ITALIANO PyCCK 2004. 1. 1 AM 12:00 JAN. 1, 2004 12:00 AM 1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM
ON ON DATE & TIME
ENGLISH
DATE FORMAT
1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM
SYSTEM
RETURN WL. REMOTE OFF ON OFF
Lithium battery
BEEP
ON
Lithium battery
62

MAIN MENU ITEM SYSTEM SUB MENU ITEM T. ZONE/DST SETTINGS LONDON LONDON PARIS PARIS CAIRO MOSCOW DUBAI KARACHI DACCA BANGKOK H.KONG TOKYO SYDNEY SOLOMON WELLGTN. SAMOA HONOLU. ANCHOR. L.A. DENVER CHICAGO N.Y. CARACAS RIO FERNAN. FERNAN. AZORES AZORES 1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM 31. DEC. 2030 11:59 PM MY CAMERA RETURN CREATE START-UP IMAGE Switches to startup image creation screen SEL. S-UP IMG. OFF CANON LOGO MY PICTURE OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND OFF DEFAULT MY SOUND CANON LOGO Lithium battery PARIS DEFAULT BACKUP Lithium battery
D/TIME SEL
1. JAN. 2004 12:00 AM
Lithium battery
S-UP SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
SHTR SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
OPER. SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
SELF-T SOUND
DEFAULT
Lithium battery
RETURN CLOSE
63
5-6 Card-related screen displays

MENU INDICATION Slideshow screen PAL MODEL REMARKS
Image setup screen
Index screen
Image protect screen
64
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Print designations screen PAL MODEL REMARKS
Send designations screen
Image erase screen Image erase selection screen
Erasing one image
Warning: Erasing in progress
65
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Image erase screen Erasing all images PAL MODEL REMARKS
Format screen
Format execution confirmation screen
Format execution screen
66
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Card mix selection screen PAL MODEL REMARKS
Mix type setting screen
Animation type setting screen
Mix level setting screen
67
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Stitch assist screen PAL MODEL REMARKS
My camera settings My camera settings screen
Startup image creation screen
Recording position selection
68
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION My camera settings Record execution confirmation PAL MODEL REMARKS
Message being created
Startup image selection screen
Startup sound selection screen
Select Shutter Sound screen
69
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION My camera settings Operation sound selection screen PAL MODEL REMARKS
Self-timer sound selection screen
PC connection screen During USB connection
During IEEE1394 connection
70
5-7 Direct print setting screen

MENU INDICATION Direct print setting screen Direct print setting initial screen PAL MODEL
Print selection screen
PC Direct (CP-10/100) and BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers
PictBridge compatible printer (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i)
CARD#1 BORDERED STYLE TRIMMING 1 COPIES PRINT CANCEL OFF OFF 1 COPIES
DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT PAPER TRIMMING PRINT CANCEL
Cancel print screen
CARD#1 BORDERED
DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT
NOW PRINTING (1/3) STOP
NOW PRINTING (1/3) STOP
Cancel selection screen
71
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Direct print setting screen Quantity setting screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers PictBridge compatible printer (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i) PAL MODEL
Trimming setting screen

CARD#1 BORDERED STYLE TRIMMING 1 COPIES PRINT CANCEL OFF OFF 1 COPIES DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT PAPER TRIMMING PRINT CANCEL
72
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Direct print setting screen Paper setting, paper size setting screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers
STYLE
CARD#1
PAL MODEL
PAPERSIZE
CARD#2 CARD#3 8.5"x11" A4 DEFAULT
MENU MENU
PAPER
CARD#1
CANCEL
SET
NEXT
STYLE
CARD#1
PAPERSIZE
CARD#2 CARD#3 8.5"x11" A4 DEFAULT
MENU MENU
PAPER CARD#1
CANCEL
SET
NEXT
STYLE
CARD#1 CARD#2 CARD#3 8.5"x11" A4 DEFAULT
MENU MENU
PAPERSIZE
PAPER CARD#2
CANCEL
SET
NEXT
* Camera Direct compatible BJ printers only.
* Only paper sizes supported by the printer can be selected from among Default, L, 2L, Postcard, Card, 4 6, Letter, Letter, A4, Roll (L), Roll (2L), Roll (A4), and 5 7.
73
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Direct print setting screen Paper type setting screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers PictBridge compatible printer (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i)
PAPERTYPE
PHOTO FAST PHOTO DEFAULT
PAL MODEL
MENU PREVIOUS
SET NEXT
PAPERTYPE
No function
MENU PREVIOUS
SET NEXT
PAPERTYPE
MENU PREVIOUS
SET NEXT
* Only paper types supported by the selected paper size can be selected from among Default, Photo Paper and Fast Photo Paper.
74
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT MENU INDICATION Direct print setting screen Borders/no borders setting, 8-of-1 screen layout selection screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers
STYLE BORDERLESS BORDERED DEFAULT
PAL MODEL

LAYOUT
BORDERS
BORDERED
MENU MENU PREVIOUS SET NEXT
LAYOUT BORDERS
BORDERED
LAYOUT BORDERS
BORDERLESS
Split screen (CP-10/100) and 8-of-1 screen layout setting

STYLE LAYOUT IMAGE BORDERLESS BORDERED DEFAULT MULTIPLE
MENU MENU
(CP-200/CP-300)
PREVIOUS
SET
NEXT
75
5-8 Print designations

MENU INDICATION Print designations screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers PAL MODEL PictBridge compatible printer (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i)
99
CARD #1 BORDERLESS STYLE
PRINT ALL MARKED IMAGES 98 DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT RESUME OFF OFF PAPER PRINT CANCEL
PRINT ALL MARKED IMAGES OK RESUME CANCEL
Cancel print screen
99
CARD #1 BORDERLESS
NOW PRINTING(1/98) 98 DEFAULT DEFAULT BORDERLESS OFF OFF
NOW PRINTING(1/99) STOP
STOP
Restart print screen
98
CARD BORDERLESS
98 IMAGES REMAINING STOP PRINTING? 98 OFF DEFAULT OFF DEFAULT BORDERLESS OK CANCEL
98 IMAGES REMAINING STOP PRINTING? OK CANCEL
Style setting screen
99
CARD #1 BORDERLESS STYLE
CHANGE PRINT STYLE OK RESUME CANCEL
No function
76
5-9 Warning displays
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED

When copy-protected tape is played.
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED

When copy protection information is detected during DV input or LINE input, or when the signal output from the television or VCR is garbled during analog input.
SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME

When the power is turned on without setting the area and/or time and date.
REMOVE THE CASSETTE

When a cassette is inserted while there is a mechanical error or condensation in the unit.
CHECK THE DV INPUT

When REC is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC, without a connection to DV input, or in a condition where the connected DV input cannot be recognized.
CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK

When the battery power is low.
CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED

When condensation is detected (if a cassette is inserted, a REMOVE THE CASSETTE message appears).
THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

When REC is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC in VCR mode, if the cassette is set for erasure prevention. In Camera mode, when the power is turned ON, when the Start/Stop button is pressed, and when a cassette is inserted.
TAPE END
When the tape end is detected, or when a key (FF, PLAY, etc.) which drives the tape forward is pressed in a mode that allows transition to forward driving during the detection process.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [REC MODE]

When the Audio Dubbing or AV Insert button is pressed at a tape position recorded in LP, or when LP mode is detected during Audio Dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [AUDIO MODE]

When the Audio Dubbing button is pressed at a tape position with 16-bit or 4-channel simultaneous recording, or when 16-bit mode or 4-channel simultaneous recording mode is detected during audio dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [BLANK]

When a blank tape area is detected during Audio Dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE

77
HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE

When a print head is clogged.
CARD ERROR
When a card error occurs and data cannot be recorded on the card.
CARD FULL
When the card is full.
NAMING ERROR
When the maximum number of file numbers and directory numbers are created.
UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE
When an attempt is made to playback an image in an unplayable format, an incompatible JPEG image, or an image with corrupt data.
PRINT ORDER ERROR

When there are too many print marks (100 or more), or when a mark file cannot be edited.
NO CARD
When there is no card in the camcorder socket.
NO IMAGES
When there are no images to be played in the card.
THE CARD IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

When an attempt is made to record on an SD card set for erasure prevention, in a mode that allows card recording (VCR mode, Card Recording mode).
NOW CREATING START-UP IMAGE

The startup screen is being written to flash memory.
THIS IMAGE CANNOT BE USED AS START-UP IMAGE IN CARD POSITION

When Start/Stop button is pressed in the Camera mode.
THIS IMAGE CANNOT BE RECORDED

(Models MVX250i E)
DIFFERENT CARD FORMAT

When the card format is not supported by the camcorder.
78
PAPER ERROR
When there is a problem with the paper.
NO PAPER
When the paper has not been inserted into the printer properly or there is no paper in the printer
PAPER JAM
When the paper has jammed during printing.
NO INK
When the ink has not been installed properly or the ink has run out.
LOW INK LEVEL

When there is not much ink left.
WASTE TANK FULL

When the waste ink tank is full.
CANNOT PRINT !
When trying to print a still image recorded by a different camcorder, a still image in a different format, or a still image that was loaded to a computer and edited.
COULD NOT PRINT * IMAGES

When trying to use the DPOF settings to print a * still images recorded by a different camcorder, a still images in a different format, or a still images that was loaded to a computer and edited.
SET PRINT ORDER

When trying to use the PRINT command in the Card Playback menu to print a still image not designated for printing.
CANNOT TRIM
When an attempt has been made to trim still images with a 160 120 image size. Alternatively, when an attempt has been made to trim images whose aspect ratio differs significantly from 4:3.
READJUST TRIMMING
When the Style setting has been changed after trimming was set.
PRINTER ERROR
When trouble has occurred in the printer.
COMMUNICATION ERROR
When an error has occurred during communication.
PRINTER IN USE
79
PRINTER WARMING UP
When the printer is getting ready.
PAPER LEVER ERROR

When the printers paper lever is not at the correct position.
PRINTER COVER OPEN

When the printers cover is open.
NO PRINTHEAD
When the ink head has not been installed in the printer.
FIRMWARE UPDATED INCOMPATIBLE PEPAR SIZE

When an unavailable paper size was selected in the paper size menu after displaying the paper size menu and changing the settings at the printer side.
CHECK PRINT SETTINGS

When the printer setting status displays the current recording value and the Easy Direct button was pressed even though this value cannot be used by PictBridge when the printer is connected.
PRINT ERROR
When a printer error occurs due to unknown reason.
SEND DESIGNATION ERROR TOO MANY IMAGES DISCONNECT CABLE CANNOT TRANSFER!
When the Easy Direct button was pressed when a motion video was displayed (SET UP icon and the icons to its right gray out, and the Easy Direct button lights up) while PC Wallpaper was set.
80
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTON
CONTENTS
1. P.C.B. Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 2. Power Supply Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 2-1 Startup of Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 2-2 Power Fuses ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 2-3 Power Supply Circuits ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 3. Built-in Charger Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 3-2 Operation at Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 3-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8 3-2-2 Progress of Charging --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 4. Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10 4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11 4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 4-2-3 Card Motion Picture Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 4-3 Recorder Signal Processing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 4-4 Audio Signal Flow --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 5. System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15 5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15 5-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 5-3 Servo Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 5-5 Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 19 5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 19
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
1. P.C.B. Functions
(1) MAIN P.C.B. System-Control Section IC100 IC102 MODE MI-COM BACK UP System control MODE MI-COM reset Memory for DIGIC DV (64M) Memory for DIGIC DV (64M) Camera digital signal processing, card image processing, and USB interface PM Section IC1810 IC1811 IC3201 IC3203 Video Section IC2000 IC2300 IC2301 IC2302 CHARGE IC OPE AMP DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL 4.7V REGULATOR VRP2 FLASH VIC4 SDRAM Charge control IC Charge detection operational amplifier Power PWM regulator controller 4.7V regulator Record playback head amplifier Memory for FR MI-COM (16M) Digital VCR signal processing LSI, IEEE1394 interface, FR MI-COM, and Analog video input/output signal processing Memory for VIC4 (64M) Operational amplifier for reel sensor Drum, capstan, and loading motor driver
Camera/Card Section IC1101 SDRAM IC1102 IC1103 SDRAM DIGIC DV
MO Driver Section IC300 OPE AMP IC301 (2) CAV P.C.B. Camera Section IC1001 IC1002 IC1004 IC1200 CVF Section IC1501 Audio Section IC801 (3) CCD P.C.B. IC1070 (4) LCD P.C.B. IC901 IC902 IC4201 EEPROM LCD DRIVE DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL INVERTER TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER 2.8V REGULATOR LENS DRIVE EVF DRIVER AUDIO INTERFACE MOTOR DRIVE
Oscillation circuit inverter CCD, TG, CCD output signal sampling, AGC, A/D converter, and CCD V-DRIVER 2.8V Regulator Zoom, focus motor driver, IRIS driver, and gyro output amp EVF LCD (CVF) drive Analog input/output signal processing, speaker amplifier
CCD
CCD image sensor
EEPROM for LCD data LCD signal processing and drive Backlight drive
(5) CVF P.C.B. Signal transfer from CAV P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, back-light LED turn-on (6) JACK1 P.C.B. AV JACK, IEEE1394 terminal, External microphone jack, Remote controller photosensor IC1601 P SENSOR GYRO Pitch-direction angular speed detection IC1602 Y SENSOR GYRO Yaw-direction angular speed detection
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION (7) JACK2 P.C.B. USB terminal, S terminal (8) KEY P.C.B. Memory card slot, various keys
2. Power Supply Circuit

2-1 Startup of Power Supply
MAIN P.C.B.
FROM DC JACK JACK DET + 23
KEY P.C.B.
EJECT P.C.B.
OPERATION KEY UNIT

DMC-III CASSETTE IN SW POWER SW
28 CN101
LITHIUM BATTERY
EJ SW CN91 11
CN102
CN2102 10
CN303 12
CN101 2
13
3V REG. DET SW
IC102 BACK UP
EJECT SW 66 14 E3V 80 DC V DET CAS IN 67 18 E3 DET 4 12 VCC 10 RESET 25 LI DET 71 DC J DET VTR 76 POWER SW CAMERA 77 POWER SW NET 51 POWER SW
RESET 2.6V DET.
11 2
FROM BATTERY TERMINAL + DVDD 2.7V 5 2.5V REG. 7
IC100 MODE MI-COM.
53 CAM ON 52 VTR ON
VTR ON PM SECTION
SERIAL DATA
IC2301 FR MI-COM. (VIC4)
Fig. 1
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Backup Lithium Battery LI3V power from the lithium battery is input to pin 3 of the IC102, and it is output from pin 12 as power to the MODE MI-COM. Thus, the MODE MI-COM performs data backup and clock operation when main power supply is not connected. When the voltage of the lithium battery decreases below 2.6 V (or when the lithium battery is not loaded), the IC102 outputs the L signal from pin 2. Upon receipt of this signal at the time of power-on, the MODE MI-COM sends it to the FR MI-COM, which then issue a lithium battery low-level warning indication. Main Power Supply Main power (DC-JACK/BATTERY) is supplied to pin 13 of IC102. Through the internal regulator in IC102, the main power thus supplied is converted to 3V power, which is output as E3V from pin 14 of IC102. Furthermore, through the internal switch, the main power is converted to LI3V, which is output from pin 12 of IC102 as a power voltage for driving the MODE MI-COM. When main power is supplied, the "H" signal is output from pin 4 of the IC101. Upon detection of this "H" signal, the MODE MICOM recognizes the main power source has been provided. Then, the COM MI-COM carries out initialization and sets up the standby state. In this state, the MODE MI-COM performs detection of startup-related switches. When it detects that any one of the startup-related switches has been turned on, the CAM ON (H) and VTR ON (H) signals are output from pins 52 or 53, respectively. Upon output of the CAM ON (H) and VTR ON (H) signals, power to each circuit is turned on. At power-on of each circuit, a voltage of 2.7/2.5 V is fed to pin 5/7 of the IC102. Then, through the internal switch, power to the MODE MI-COM is output from pin 12 for saving current consumption.
2-2 Power Fuses
MAIN P.C.B.
CN3202 BATT. TERNINAL BATT. +
FU3201 CN3211 DC JACK DC + CN3201 DC + FU3202 FU3203
CCD, 1.4V, 2.7V, 3V, DC/DC CONVERTOR LCD, 4.7V, 5V, VTR UNREG MECHA UNREG
JACK1 P.C.B.
FU3205 FU1810
SHDE UNREG CHARGE UNREG
Fig. 2 The power supply from the battery DC JACK is supplied to five fuses on the MAIN P.C.B., through which the following five power voltage are delivered. (1) CCD, 1.4V, 2.7V, 3V, DC/DC UNREG : FU3201 CCD drive power source (-7V, +15V) 1.4V power source (MACS1.4V, DVDD1.4V, AVDD1.4V) 2.7V power source (M SDRAM2.7V, AA2.7V, SDRAM2.7V, AVDD2.7V, LCD2.7V, DIF2.7V) 3V power source (DVDD3V, CAM3V, HA3V) DC/DC CONVERTER power source (2) LCD, 4.7V, 5V, VCR UNREG : FU3202 LCD drive power source (8.5V) 4.7V power source (AA4.7V, HA4.7V) 5V power source (P5V, LCD5V) VCR UNREG (3) MECHA UNREG : FU3203 DRUM /CAPSTAN (4) SHOE UNREG : FU3205 Advanced Accessory shoe power source (5) CHARGE UNREG : FU1810 Charge circuit power source
2-3 Power Supply Circuits

Figure 3 shows the power supply circuits. The ON/OFF condition of each power supply voltage is controlled by the VTR ON / CAM ON signals output from the MODE MI-COM.
MAIN P.C.B.
46 LPF UNREG REG. Q3204 UNREG REG. Q3203 LPF LPF MACS 1.4V AVDD 1.4V DVDD 1.4V
PWM CH-1
50
43
SDRAM 2.7V AVDD 2.7V DIF 2.7V DVDD 2.7V
PWM
53
IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL
CH-2
40
UNREG REG. Q3205
LPF
AA 2.7V M SDRAM 2.7V
PWM CH-3
56
LPF LPF
LCD 2.7V CAM 3V DVDD 3V
37
UNREG IC3203 REG. Q3206 REG.
HA 3V AA 4.7V HA 4.7V
PWM CH-4
57
21
P 5V UNREG REG. Q3207 UNREG REG. Q3208 UNREG CCD 1 5V CAP VM LPF LCD 5V DRUM VM
PWM CH-5
60
15
PWM CH-6
61
11
PWM CH-7 VTR ON CAM ON 28 30 31 PWM CH-8
62
REG. CCD -7V Q3201
64
REG.
LCD 8.5V
Q3202 L3211
Fig. 3
3. Built-in Charger Circuit
BATTERY
+ THERMISTOR
BATT. TERNINAL + T 4,5 3 1,2
CN3202 BATT + BATT INFO AD BATT CN1801 DC IN OFF
MAIN P.C.B.
UNREG CN3212 DC JACK + DETECT CN3211 DC + 1 CN51 DC J SW 4 CN3201 DC + CN2101 DC J SW
MAIN P.C.B. PM SECTION
2 23
JACK1 P.C.B.
A/D V DC V DET BATT INFO DC J DET A/D I
MAIN P.C.B. MODE MI-COM
Q1814 FU1810 Q1815
IC1811 CHARGE I DETECT

4 3
INIT CHARGE 1 CHARGE
MAIN P.C.B. MODE MI-COM
14 VCC
15 OUTPUT DRIVE
IC1810 MB3833A CHARGE CONTROL
Q1813
OSC 12 13
POWER SAVE 7 8 Q1812
Fig. 4
3-1 Outline
The main circuit elements and their functions are as follows. (1) MODE MI-COM Control of IC1810 Detection and display of charging progress Error discrimination and display Battery type discrimination and DC jack input detection (2) IC1810 (CHARGE CONTROL) Charging voltage and charging current control
3-2 Operation at Charging

3-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging
When the following conditions are satisfied, the MODE MI-COM (IC100) controls the IC 1810 starts charging.
Conditions 1 2 3 4 5 Main unit power is turned OFF DC jack is connected. Power supplied from DC jack UNREG voltage is 8.4 0.3 V. Battery temperature is within the range of -6.8C to 49.3C.
Detection MODE MI-COM MODE MI-COM pin 71 DC JACK DET MODE MI-COM pin 80 DC V DET MODE MI-COM pin 87 BATT.AD MODE MI-COM pin 88 BATT.INFO
Source of detection DC JACK DC IN VTR UNREG. Battery T terminal
If the conditions (4) and (5) are not satisfied, a charge error is indicated.
3-2-2 Progress of Charging

The IC1810 starts a trickle charge under control of the MODE MI-COM (IC100). The trickle charge continues until the battery voltage reaches 6.5V. At the point in time when 6.5V is reached, the IC1810 starts a 0.66A quick charge. Then, the charge current decreases gradually with the progress of charging (because of an increase in impedance of the battery). When the charge current becomes 80 mA or less, the end-of-charging indication is provided. Thereafter, supplementary charging is performed for 24 minutes at maximum until the charge current becomes 40 mA or less.
Charging current
LED flashes once Quick charge 0.66A When battery voltage reaches 6.5V, quick charge starts.
LED flashes twice
LED lights up steadily
0.56A
An error is indicated if the battery voltage becomes 5.7V or lower during quick charging or constant-voltage charging. An error is indicated if the battery temperature is not within the range of 10 C to 52.5 C. Trickle 100mA 80mA When the battery voltage reaches 5.2 V, the trickle timer (2) is started. 40mA Trickle1 Trickle2 Quick charge timer Timeout timer timer error 5min. max Timeout error 135min. max Timeout error Total timer 330min.max Full charge indication at timeout 144min.max 2-flash Full charge timer indication at timeout 204min.max Supplementary charge timer 24min.max Elapsed time
Fig. 5
4. Signal Processing Circuit

4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit
Figure 6 shows the entire block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.
CCD P.C.B.
LENS IC1001 CCD
CAV P.C.B.
IC1002 TG/CDS/AGC/AD /V-DRIVER IC801 AIF4 IC501 EVF DRIVE CVF LCD
SPEAKER IC1103 DIGIC DV
IC1101/IC1102 SDRAM
MEMORY CARD
KEY P.C.B.
USB IC2301 VIC4 LCD
DV TERMINAL
JACK2 P.C.B.
IC2302 SDRAM
IC903 LCD DRIVE
FR MICOM
LCD P.C.B.
MIC MIN AV JACK IC2000 VRP2 REC/PB HEAD USB TERMINAL DIF
JACK1 P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
Fig. 6
10
4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing

4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording
64 Mbit SDRAM IC1101 32 bit
SDRAM IF
CDS/ AGC/ AD/ TG/ V-DRIVER IC1002
Deformation, Drawing REND
CCD IC1070
36MHz
proc
resize
nr
Synthesis COMP
VIC4 IC2301
12bit 36MHz
Camera signal processing GRAB Audio IC1103 DIGIC DV
JPEG JPEG
CARD IF FR MI-COM
AIF IC801
Fig. 7
4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording
SDRAM IF
RAW YCC 1 YCC 2
DMA
FR MI-COM
CCD IC1070
36MHz
proc
resize
nr
Synthesis COMP
VIC4 IC2301
12bit 36MHz
Camera signal processing GRAB
JPEG
CARD IF
SD CARD
AIF IC801 IC1103 DIGIC DV
Audio USB
Fig. 8
11
4-2-3 Card Motion Picture Recording
SDRAM IF
YCC 1 YCC 2
DMA
FR MI-COM
Synthesis COMP
CCD IC1001
36MHz
proc
12bit 36MHz
resize
nr
VIC4 IC2301
Camera signal processing GRAB Audio IC1103 DIGIC DV
JPEG
CARD IF
SD CARD
AIF IC801
Fig. 9 <CCD> IC1001 1/4.5 inches interlaced CCD Complementary color filter Total number of pixels Approx. 1,330,000 Effective number of pixels Tape : Approx. 860,000 / Card : Approx. 1,230,000 <CDS/AGC/AD/TG/V-DRIVER> IC1002 A signal read out of the CCD is extracted. Then, after the extracted signal is subjected to AGC processing and A/D conversion, it is output as a digital signal. <DIGIC DV> IC1103 This circuit carries out various camera signal processing operations (EIS, AWB, etc.), and digital effect processing. It also performs multimedia-application signal processing mainly for still image recording. Feature engine High-speed card interface JPEG Audio data compression (ADPCM) USB function <SDRAM> IC1102, IC1101 Field memory for camera signal processing and digital effect processing Image data memory for Memory card write/read operation
12
4-3 Recorder Signal Processing
VIC BLOCK IC2302 SDRAM SDRAM INTERFACE
DIF BLOCK DIF INTERFACE DV TERMINAL
A DATA IC1103 DIGIC B DATA DV VIDEO INTERFACE COMPRESSION /DEMOD. ECC REC/PB PROCESS IC2000 VRP2
VIDEO HEAD
75 DRIVE
D/A
A/D
BUS
AUDIO INTERFACE
IC801 AIF4
AV JACK
AV JACK S TERMINAL CVF LCD LCD
MI-COM. BLOCK R,G,B FR MI-COM. IC2301 VIC4
Cache 1K Byte
COprocesser
Fig. 10
< VIC4 >IC2301 The VIC, MI-COM, DIF INTERFACE and VIDEO INTERFACE circuits are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. A/B DATA : Input in camera mode. B DATA is output and A DATA is input at playback. (DIGIC DV digital effect circuit is used at playback.) The video data and signals input to VIC4 are subjected to digital VCR format signal processing. Audio data, subcode data and ITI data are also created at VIC4, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of DV format. DIF : After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal. At digital input, the data enters VIC4 signal processing circuit via the opposite route.
< VRP2 >IC2000 Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC4 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while undergoing head switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified and sent to VIC4.
13
4-4 Audio Signal Flow
MIC
IC1103 DIGIC DV
MEM IF CARD IF
IC2301 VIC4
IC2000 VRP2 REC/ PB HEAD
HEAD PHONE AV JACK
L R L R
IC801 AIF4
SDRAM Serial
CARD
SPEAKER DRIVER
B EEP
FR MI-COM.
SPEAKER
Fig. 11 < AIF >IC801 Out ALC (Auto Level Control), fading, and amplification of various output signals. For the beep tone issued at ejection, etc., the signal from the FR MI-COM is generated in the circuit and changed over in the AIF. The microphone amplifier, HPF, ALC, A/D, D/A, and digital I/F, SPEAKER DRIVER with ALC circuits are contained in this IC. It is also used for changeover between ordinary voice sound and beep sound. < VIC4 > The following processing operations are carried out for reducing noise from the DMC mechanism. Noise cancellation based on correlation of V-cycle noise components. Noise component reduction by means of trapping. < Automatic wind noise cutting> For efficient reduction of wind noise, the cutoff frequency of the wind noise cutting HPF circuit is regulated according to the current level of wind noise.
AIF4
(L) HPF
DIGIC DV
VIC4
L+R LR
MIC IN
(R)
HPF
HPF
150Hz
600Hz
WIND DETECT (L R)
40Hz
3kHz
FR MI-COM.
Fig. 12
14
5. System Control, Servo

5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo
Figure 13 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is performed by the FR MI-COM (IC2301) and MODE MI-COM (IC100) on MAIN P.C.B.
ZOOM PHOTO UNIT

ZOOM SW PHOTO SW
MAIN P.C.B.
IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER
D-VS C-VS D-VM C-VM

DRUM DRIVER
DRUM M
FG/PG D-ERR C-ERR DFG/PG CFG FG REMOTE CONTROL SIGNAL RECEIVER IC2301 VIC4 IC301 MOTOR DRIVER LOADING
CAPSTAN DRIVER
CAPSTAN M
JACK1 P.C.B.
VIC
JACK2 P.C.B.
SELECT SW FR MI-COM
LOADING DRIVER
IC2000 VRP2 HEAD IC2300 FLASH

MODE SW C.DOWN SW BOT/EOT SENS. DEW REEL FG
OPERATION KEY UNIT

START/STOP SW
IC801 AIF4
MIC POWER SW EJECT SW IC100 MODE MI-COM
R-KEY
DMC III
IRIS DRIVE
LENS
MOTOR DRIVE
IC1200 LENS DRIVER
IC1103 DIGIC DV MEMORY CARD
LCD P.C.B.
IC901 EEPROM
IC1002 CDS AGC A/D TG V-DRIVER
CAV P.C.B.
IC1501 EVF DRIVER
IC903 LCD DRIVER
KEY P.C.B.
Fig. 13
15
5-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM

(1) FR MI-COM (IC2301 : VIC4) The FR MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through communication with MODE MI-COM. It also detects of various sensors and switches (DMCIII). Following are the major functions. VIC (Video) control / AIF4 (Audio Interface) controls Control in accordance with IEEE1394 USB interface control AUDIO control DMC III mechanism control DIGIC DV control Card control CCD drive control AE, AF, AWB control EIS (Electric Image Stabilizer) control OSD (On Screen Display) bitmap control PRINTER control * The FR MI-COM in this machine does not have a dedicated EEPROM. Since a flash ROM is used for the FR MI-COM as a substitute for the EEPROM, it is required to update the flash ROM after adjustment and data modification regarding the FR MI-COM. (2) MODE MI-COM (IC100) The MODE MI-COM is mainly in charge of the power-on sequence and charging control. Following are the major functions. Key input LCD / EVF control Remote control input Power ON/OFF control Built-in charge circuit control MIC (Memory In Cassette) control * The MODE MI-COM in this machine does not have a dedicated EEPROM. Since a flash ROM is used for the FR MI-COM as a substitute for the EEPROM, it is required to update the flash ROM after adjustment and data modification regarding the FR MI-COM.
16
5-3 Servo Control

Servo control is carried out by the VIC4 (VIC and FR MI-COM). The FR MI-COM is used for servo control of motor ON/OFF and rotational direction, and the VIC is used to output rotational speed and phase control signals. More specifically in terms of signal flow, the VIC detects the FG/PG and PB-RF signals from the motor, and sends the detected signal information to the FR MI-COM. Then, the FR MI-COM generates an error signal to be output to the VIC. Thereafter, the VIC outputs an error signal (PWM), which is driven on the MAIN P.C.B. for sending a control voltage to the motor driver IC.
DC/DC CONVERTER
DRUM VM DRUM VS CAP VM CAP VS
LOAD ON/ UNLOAD FR DERR VIC4 CERR IC301 MO DRIVE
DMC III
LOAD+/LOADU/V/W Ucoil/Vcoil/Wcoil LOADING MOTOR DRUM MOTOR CAPSTAN MOTOR
DA CFG
CFG2
DA S REEL DA T REEL
S REEL Hall SENSOR T REEL Hall SENSOR
Fig. 14
17
5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB)
IC1101 SDRAM
IC1001 CCD
IC1002 TG/CDS AGC/AD /V-DRIVER
IC1103 DIGIC DV
Still Picture Signal Processing MEMORY CARD
Signal flow of (in) Card camera mode Signal flow of (in) Personal computer connection mode
FR MI-COM
USB CONTROLER
USB TERMINAL
Fig. 15 In the card camera mode, an image signal produced in the camera section is sent to the memory card via the DIGIC DV. In the personal computer connection mode, the USB terminal and the memory card are connected through the USB controller. The FR MI-COM performs control of changeover between the card camera mode and the personal computer connection mode.
18
5-5 Error Detection

If an abnormality has been occurred in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters. The LCD indicates PLEASE UNLOAD THE CASSETTE and blinks EJECT.
5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions

The following table gives error detecting conditions.
Kind Drum error Condition Error detecting mode FG frequency when steady Error detecting level Error detecting time Capstan error Error detecting mode FG frequency when steady Error detecting level Error detecting time Reel error Error detecting mode Error detection Starting / steady 900Hz Starting: Beyond 80-150%. Steady : 30% max. Starting : 5sec. Steady : 0.5sec. Starting / steady 1347Hz Starting : 80% max. Steady : 60Hz max. Starting : 2sec. Steady : 2sec. Starting / Normal / UNLOAD Normally : The C-FG count per reel FG cycle is Starting : M ore than 3296 Steady : M ore than 2256 UNLOAD : Reel FG cycle is 1 sec or more (Take-up reel only for both) Loading error Error detecting mode Error detection M ode transfer M ode transfer time STANDBY-STOP : 6sec STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec STOP-PLAY : 3sec M ode SW T, S-REEL FG C-FG C-FG Detection D-FG
5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection

The following table gives processing after error detection. Pop up Error stop : Error displayerror eject pop up error clear : Error displaySTOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)
Cassette in Drum error Capstan error Reel error Loading error Pop up Pop up ------Pop up Loading Pop up ------------Pop up During unloading Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop Loading completed Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop During tape running Error stop Error stop Error stop ------During mode transfer Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
19
DISASSEMBLING
CONTENTS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling Notes List of Supplies 1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 1-2 Separation of Accessory Shoe and LI Battery Holder ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 1-3 Separation of Top Cover Assy --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 1-4 Separation of R-LCD Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 1-6 Separation of Front Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 1-7 Separation of Left Cover Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 1-8 Separation of Shields ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10 1-9 Separation of CVF Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 1-10 Separation of JACK 2 P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 1-11 Separation of Camera Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 1-12 Separation of CAV P.C.B. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15 1-13 Separation of MAIN P.C.B. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 1-14 Separation of Recorder Holder ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 1-15 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 1-16 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 1-17 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23 1-18 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 24 1-19 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 26 1-20 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit - 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 28 1-21 Disassembly of R-LCD Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30 1-22 Disassembly of R-LCD Unit - 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31 1-23 Disassembly of R-LCD Unit - 3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32 1-24 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33 1-25 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34 1-26 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35 1-27 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 1-28 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38 1-29 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39 1-30 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 1-31 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41 1-32 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43 1-33 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 44 1-34 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 5 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 45 1-35 Disassembly of Camera Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46 1-36 Disassembly of Lens Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47 1-37 List of Screws Used ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 48 1-38 List of Disassembly Photos ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING
1. Disassembling and Reassembling - (1)

Notes (1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part. (2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure diagram and interconnection diagram for boards. Lateral engaging connector ( The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.) : Contacts are positioned downward. (board side) : Contacts are positioned upward.
Metal contact (Pins' face down)
:
Lengthwise engaging connector ( The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.) Indicated by Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the shafts indicate the noncontacts.
Metal contact
Metal contact (Pins' face up)

:
Metal contact
(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401B (CY9-8011-000) (4) If any part to be replaced has UL tape attached on it, be sure to reattach UL tape at the same position in reassembling. (5) Use the new type connector (MAIN P.C.B. CN102) as illustrated.
FPC Metal contact
FPC
Metal contact
Lock
Unlock
(6) For replacing the fuse mounted on the MAIN P.C.B., it is required to remove the CVF unit.
1. Disassembling and Reassembling - (2)

List of Supplies
Item Name Grease FLOIL C-1Z Grease FLOIL 948P Hanal FL-778 Hanal KS-39M Hanal KS-50M EM-30L Dia Bond No. 1663G Sponge (W H T : 300mm 200mm 6mm) Adhesive T ape, No.354E (W L T : 9mm 50m 0.15mm, UL type) Adhesive T ape, No. 501F (W L T : 10mm 50m 0.16mm, UL type) Sheet, Shield (W H : 250mm 250mm) Item Number DY9-3039-000 Lubrication DY9-3051-000 Lubrication DY9-3026-010 Lubrication DY9-3053-000 Lubrication DY9-3047-000 Lubrication DY9-3031-000 Lubrication CY9-8129-000 Adhesive DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration isolating /sound absorbing material DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape DY9-3034-000 General-purpose double-side-coated adhesive tape DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material Purpose Remarks DMC III DMC III Cover Cover Cover, DMC III Cover LCD
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart

(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart. (2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures.
START
: MAIN FLOW : SUB FLOW : MAIN UNIT
1-4 R-LCD Unit
1-22 KEY P.C.B.
1-23 Right Cover Unit
1-24 Right Cover Ass'y
1-23 LCD Unit
1-25 LCD Hinge Unit
1-5 Rear Cover Unit
1-29 Power Switch Ass'y 1-29 Rear Cover
1-26 LCD Ass'y 1-26 Backlight Ass'y
1-6 Front Cover Unit
1-15 Jack1 P.C.B.
1-26 LCD P.C.B.
1-16 Mic Ass'y
1-17 Front Cover Ass'y
1-7 Left Cover Unit
1-18 Zoom Photo Key Ass'y
1-19 Speaker
1-20 Cassette Arm Ass'y
1-8 Camera Recorder CVF Unit
1-9 CVF Unit 1-10 Jack2 P.C.B.
1-33 CVF Ass'y
1-33 CVF P.C.B.
1-11 Recorder Unit
1-12 CAV P.C.B. 1-13 Main P.C.B.
1-14 DMC lll 1-11 Camera Unit
1-35 CCD P.C.B. 1-35 CCD Ass'y
1-35 Lens Ass'y END
1-2 Separation of Accessory Shoe and LI Battery Holder

(1) Remove four screws (a 4), and detach the Accessory Shoe. (2) Open the LCD Unit, and detach the LI Battery Holder. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Tighten the four screws (a 4) on the Accessory Shoe in a diagonal sequence.
(1) - a
Accessory Shoe
ACC Cover (1)
LCD Unit
(2) (2) LI Battery Holder
a
5mm Metal M1.7 Flat Head Screw Fig. 1
1-3 Separation of Top Cover Assy

(1) Open the Cassette Cover, and remove one screw (b 1). (2) Disengage claws A and B. While being free from part E of the Shoe Connector, pull up the claw A and claw B sides to demount the Top Cover Assy. <Note on Reassembling> (1) When remounting the Top Cover Assy, engage claws B and C first. Then, while being free from the part E of the Shoe Connector, insert the claw A and part D sides for engagement.
Part D
Top Cover Ass'y
Claw A Claw C (1) - b Claw B (2) Cassette Cover
(1) Part E
b
5mm Metal M1.7 Fig. 2
1-4 Separation of R-LCD Unit

(1) Remove eleven screws (c 1, d 5, e 2, f 2, g 1), disconnect the CN101, and detach the R-LCD Unit.
(1) - e (1) - d
(1) - d R-LCD Unit (1) - d (1) - d
(1)
CN101
(1) - c
(1) (1) - f (1) - g (1) - e
(1) - f (1) - f (1) - d
(1) - f
c
6mm Metal M1.7
d
3mm Metal M1.7
g
4mm Metal M1.7
4mm 5mm Metal Metal M1.7 M1.7 (self tap) (self tap)
Fig. 3
1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit

(1) Disengage the Grip Belt from the Grip Hook. (2) Open the Cassette Cover, and remove four screws (d 1, h 3). (3) Disconnect the CN101 and CN3202, and detach the Rear Cover Unit.
Grip Belt Grip Hook (1) Cassette Cover
(2) (2) - h
(3) (2) - d CN3202 CN101 (3) (3)
(2) - h
(2) - h
d
3mm Metal M1.7
h
3.5mm Metal M1.7
Fig. 4
Rear Cover Unit
1-6 Separation of Front Cover Unit

(1) Open the Jack1 Cover and Jack2 Cover, and remove six screws (h 4, i 1, j 1). (2) Disconnect the CN3211, CN42, and CN51. Then, while being free from the Lens Shield, detach the Front Cover Unit. (Refer to 1-8 : Separation of Shields.)
CN42
(1) - j
CN51
CN3211 (1) - h Jack1 Cover (1) (2) (1) - h (2) Lens Shield
(1) - h
(2) (2)
(1)
Jack2 Cover
(1) - i (1) - h
h
3.5mm Metal M1.7
i
5.5mm Metal M1.7
j
2mm Metal M1.7
(1) - i
(1) - h
Fig. 5
1-7 Separation of Left Cover Unit

(1) Remove four screws (k 4). (2) Open the Cassette Cover, disconnect the CN100, and then detach the Left Cover Unit. <Note on Reassembling> (1) In reassembling the Left Cover Unit, connect the CN100 first. Then, mount the Left Cover Unit while taking sufficient care not to damage the flexible cable.
(1) - k
Left Cover Unit Cassette Cover
(1) - k
(2) (2)
(1) - k (1) - k CN100 (2)
k
2.5mm Metal M1.7
(1) - k
Fig. 6
1-8 Separation of Shields

(1) Remove three screws (j 2, k 1), and then detach the Lens Shield, Lens Shield B, and FPC Shield Unit.
Part A
(1) - j
Part C
(1)
(1)
Part B Part F Part D (1)
Lens Shield Lens Shield B
(1) - j
Part E (1)
FPC Shield Unit
j
2mm
k
2.5mm Metal M1.7
(1) - k
Metal M1.7
Fig. 7
10
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Reassemble the Lens Shield, Lens Shield B, and FPC Shield Unit as illustrated below. (Refer to 1-6 : Separation of Front Cover Unit.) (2) Attach the FPC Shield above the CAV-JACK1 FPC (8 pins) to provide a distance as large as possible. With the MAIN-KEY FPC folded, it shall not come into direct contact with the CAV-JACK1 FPC.
Note on Reassembling (1) A Part of Lens Shield
C Part of FPC Shield
Front Cover
Refer to 1-6:Separation of Front Cover Unit.
B Part of Lens Shield
D Part of Lens Shield B
E Part of Lens Shield B
F Part of CVF Unit
Note on Reassembling (2)
Lug terminal mounting angle : Within 45.0
MAIN-KEY FPC CAV-JACK1 FPC FPC Sheld Unit
Fig. 8
11
1-9 Separation of CVF Unit

(1) Detach the Shoe Connector Assy. (MVX250i E only) (2) Disconnect the CN891, and detach the ACS-MAIN FPC. (MVX250i E only) (3) Remove three screws (k 2, h 1), and then detach the Shoe Base and GND Plate. (4) Turn up the CVF Unit, remove one screw (h 1), disconnect the CN1501, and demount the CVF Unit. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Before using a service part of GND Plate, attach the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below. (2) Attach the GND plate to the Shoe Base as illustrated below.
ACS-MAIN FPC MVX250i E only Note on Reassembling (1) GND Plate
(3) - k (1) Shoe Connector Ass'y
MVX250i E only (3) - k Shoe Base (3) (3) - h
Attachment reference
A surplus part of the UL Tape shall be folded onto the back side. (2)
(3) CVF Unit GND Plate
UL Tape (9 25) Attach the UL tape before reassembling. Note on Reassembling (2)
(4) - h (4) (4) Shoe Base
GND Plate
(2)
h
3.5mm Metal M1.7
k
2.5mm Metal M1.7
CN891
CN1501
Fig. 9
12
1-10 Separation of JACK 2 P.C.B.

(1) Detach the Cushion RC1 and RC2. (2) Remove two screws (k 2), disconnect the CN91, and detach the JACK2 P.C.B. (3) Detach the CAV-JACK1 FPC and MAIN-JACK1 FPC from the CN701 and CN2101. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Before mounting the JACK2 P.C.B., run the MAIN-JACK1 FPC, CAV-JACK1 FPC, and MAIN-JACK1 Cable through groove A. (2) Attach the Cushion RC1 and RC2 to the position indicated in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1),(2) CAV-JACK1 FPC
JACK2 P.C.B. MAIN-JACK1 FPC Cushion RC2 Align to the hole center. 1.5mm Align to a point 1.5 mm above the edge of the P.C.B. MAIN-JACK1 Cable Align to the outline Cushion RC1 of the DV Connector.
Groove A
k
2.5mm Metal M1.7
CN701 JACK2 P.C.B. (2) (3)
(2) - k CN2101 (2) - k CN91 (3) Cushion RC2 (1) (2) (1) Cushion RC1 MAIN-JACK1 FPC
Fig. 10
CAV-JACK1 FPC
13
1-11 Separation of Camera Unit

(1) Remove two screws (j 1, l 1), and then detach the Sub Holder and Insulation Rubber. (2) Remove two screws (l 2), detach the UL Tape, and disconnect the CN1000 and CN1200. Then, detach the Camera Unit, Ferrite Core, and Insulation Rubber. <Note on Reassembling> (1) With the UL Tape, secure the Ferrite Core to the position indicated in the figure below so that it will not be dislocated. <Instruction for Supply> Entire surface of Insulation Rubber : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Instruction for Supply Insulation Rubber
Note on Reassembling (1) Attachment reference Fold the UL tape.
Hanal KS-39M
Ferrite Core Rear View
(2) - l Insulation Rubber Recorder Unit Insulation Rubber (2) - l (2)
UL Tape (9 30)
j
2mm Metal M1.7
l
4.5mm Metal M1.7 Steped Screw
Ferrite Core UL Tape (9 30) (2) (2) CN1000
CN1200 (2)
Sub Holder (1) - j (1) - l Insulation Rubber

Fig. 11
Camera Unit
14
1-12 Separation of CAV P.C.B.

(1) Disconnect the CN1001 and CN1100 (B to B), and then detach the CAV P.C.B. (2) Disconnect the CN3201, remove the UL Tape, and detach the MAIN-JACK1 Cable. (3) Disconnect the CN102 and CN2102, and then detach the MAIN-KEY FPC and MAIN-JACK2 FPC. Note : Use the CN102 (MAIN P.C.B.) as illustrated below. (4) Remove the UL Tape from the MAIN-KEY FPC, and detach the Ferrite Core. <Note on Reassembling> (1) With the UL Tape, secure the Ferrite Core to the position indicated in the figure below so that it will not be dislocated. (2) Attach the MAIN-JACK1 Cable as illustrated below, and then secure it with the UL Tape.
Note on Reassembling (1) MAIN-KEY FPC Ferrite Core
Note on Reassembling (2) Run the cable through a clearance between the ICs and the connectors so that it is not pinched between them. CN3201
UL Tape (13 21) Note Contact FPC Contact FPC IC100
CN3202 CN1100 CN101 IC301 IC300 UL Tape (9 36) CN100 CN302 CN303 MAIN - JACK1 Cable
Locked
Unlocked
CN3201 (2)
CN102 (1) CN2102 CN1100 (B to B) (2) (3) MAIN - JACK2 FPC (3) UL Tape (9 36) CN1001 (B to B) CAV P.C.B.
(4) (4)
UL Tape (13 21) MAIN - KEY FPC Ferrite Core

Fig. 12
15
1-13 Separation of MAIN P.C.B.

(1) Remove three screws (k 3), UL Tape, and disconnect the CN300, CN301, CN302, and CN2000. Then, detach the MAIN P.C.B. (2) Detach the HA Shield, Shielding Rubber, PM1 Shield and PM2 Shield, from the MAIN P.C.B. (3) Detach the Core Cushion
PM2 Shield MAIN P.C.B. (1) - k (2) Core Cushion Shielding Rubber
A B
HA Shield (1) (1) (2) CN300 CN2000 CN302
(2) (2) (3)
CN303 UL Tape (9 20) CN301 (1) - k

2.5mm Metal M1.7
PM1 Shield
k
B
(1) - k
Fig. 13
16
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Core Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below. (2) Attach the Shielding Rubber to the PM Shield as illustrated below. (3) Secure the flexible cable by attaching the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Top end of IC
MAIN P.C.B.
Note on Reassembling (3) Attachment reference
UL Tape (9 20) MAIN P.C.B.
Motor
End of P.C.B.
Core Cushion
The UL tape shall not protrude from the outline of the Motor.
Note on Reassembling (2) Take care not to let the Shielding Rubber be sandwiched between the MAIN P.C.B. and the MAIN Holder. It is not allowed to attach the Shielding Rubber in an overlaying form. PM2 Shield When attaching the Shielding Rubber, push it to the part A of the Recorder Holder so that the MAIN P.C.B. will not be unseated. Part A MAIN P.C.B. PM1 Shield Recorder Holder PM1 Shield
Shielding Rubber PM Shield
Shielding Rubber
MAIN P.C.B.
Attachment reference
Fig. 14
17
1-14 Separation of Recorder Holder

(1) Remove three screws (m 3), and detach the Spring, Recorder Holder, and Insulation Rubber. <Instruction for Supply> Entire surface of Insulation Rubber : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
DMC III
Recorder Holder Insulation Rubber (1) - m
m
(1) Insulation Rubber (1) - m Insulation Rubber Instruction for Supply
Spring Insulation Rubber (1) - m
Hanal KS-39M
Fig. 15
18
1-15 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 1

(1) Detach the Jack2 Cover. (2) Disconnect the CN43, and remove three screws (e 1, f 1, h 1). Then, detach the Cushion, GND Plate, LED Window, and JACK1 P.C.B. (3) Slide the Jack2 Panel in the arrow direction to disengage the dowel A, and detach the Jack2 Panel.
Jack2 Panel Dowel A (2) - e (3) JACK1 P.C.B. (2) (2) (1) Jack2 Cover CN43 (2) - f LED Window GND Plate Cushion (2)
e
4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)
f
h
3.5mm Metal M1.7
(2) - h
Fig. 16
19
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Slide the Jack2 Panel in the arrow direction to engage the dowel A with the claw B so that the Jack2 Plate is attached to the Jack2 Cover securely. (2) Attach the GND Plate and LED Window as illustrated below. (3) Attach the Cushion as illustrated below.
Note on Reassembling (3) 1. Insert the top end part A of the Cushion in the arrow direction, and pull it outward as shown in the figure. Peel-off sheet side
Jack2 Panel Dowel A
A Jack2 Cover Claw B Cushion A LED Window
Note on Reassembling (2) LED Window
2. Insert the part B of the Cushion into a gap between the LED Window Cylinder and the CN51, and remove the peel-off sheet from the Cushion. CN51 Cylinder
B Cushion B LED Window
3. Align the end of the cutout part of the F Side Cover with the edge part C of the Cushion, align the end face D with the wall face of the F Side Cover, and attach the Cushion by turning the part B. GND Plate Part C Insert part C of the GND Plate under the LED Window. D B D C C LED Window
B Cushion
4. Attach the Cushion by folding the parts E and F. LED Window F E
E Cushion F
Fig. 17
20

(1) Detach the Front Cushion (2) Remove three screws (f 3), and detach the MIC Plate, F Base Plate, MIC Rubber, MIC Assy, MIC Shield, and MIC Sheet. (3) Detach the Cushion. (MVX250i E only)
MVX250i E only
Cushion (3)
F Base Plate MIC Sheet MIC Shield (2) - f MIC Ass'y (2) MIC Rubber (2) - f
MIC Plate
(1) Front Cushion
f
Fig. 18
21
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below. (MVX250i E only) (2) Carry out wiring for the MIC Assy Cable as illustrated below. (3) Attach the Front Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below.
MVX250i E only Cushion
Align the LED window with the dent part of the Cushion. (Attach the Cushion so that it will not protrude onto the LED window.)
Note on Reassembling (2) Arrange the four cable wires in parallel so that they are not crossed over each other.
Red / Black
White / Black Arrange the four cable wires in parallel, and run them between the dowels.
Note on Reassembling (3) The top part of the F Cover shall be turned onto the cylindrical wall.
L side White / Black
R side Red / Black
Attachment reference for Front Cushion Align the slit and the rib.
Fig. 19
22

(1) Remove three screws (f 3), and detach the Lens Ring Assy, MEGA PIXEL Plate, and Lens Rubber. (2) Using tweezers or the like, push the claw A to remove the Jack1 Cover. (3) Detach the Front Panel. Note : When detaching the Front Panel, push part B from the back side. <Note on Reassembling> (1) When attaching the Front Panel, engage the claws C, D, E, F in that order. (2) Attach the MEGA PIXEL Plate to the Lens Ring Assy, and insert the Lens Rubber in the orientation indicated in the figure below for attachment to the Front Cover Assy.
Jack1 Cover Jack1 Cover (2) Push Claw A (1) - f
Claw A MEGA PIXEL Plate Lens Ring Ass'y (1)
Lens Rubber (1) - f
(1) Front Cover Ass'y Note on Reassembling (1) Claw E Claw D
f
Front Panel
(1)
(3)
Note on Reassembling (2) Claw F MEGA PIXEL Plate Front Cover Ass'y Note Push Part B Lens Rubber Lens Ring Ass'y Claw C
Fig. 20
23
1-18 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit - 1

(1) Remove five screws (d 4, t 1). (2) Disengage two claws A and two dowels B of the Zoom Photo Key Assy. Then, with the Zoom Photo Key Assy unseated, detach the Open Knob. (3) Slide the claws C and D and the dowels E and F downward, remove the Double Sided Tape from the SPEAKER FPC, and detach the Cassette Cover. (4) Disconnect the connector from the SPEAKER FPC Unit, and detach the Zoom Photo Key Assy. (5) Detach the Zoom Top Cover and the Zoom Top Cover Tape1, 2.
Zoom Top Cover Zoom Top Cover Tape 2 Zoom Top Cover Tape 1 (5) Claw A Zoom Photo Key Ass'y (1) - d (1) - d Open Knob (2) (1) - t (4) Dowel B (5)
Dowel E
Dowel F
(3) (4) Connector
Double Sided Tape Connector
Claw C
Claw D
(1) - d Cassette Cover
d
3mm Metal M1.7
t
4.5mm Black M1.7 (self tap)
SPEAKER FPC
Fig. 21
24
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) When attaching the SPEAKER FPC, engage the dowels F and G of the Cassette Cover and secure the SPEAKER FPC with Double Sided Tape. (2) When attaching the Cassette Cover, connect the Zoom Photo Key Assy flexible cable to the connector. Then, engage the claws C and D and the dowels E and F while taking care not to dislocate the Speaker. (3) When attaching the Zoom Photo Key Assy, mount the Open Knob and then engage the claws A (two points) and the dowels B (two points) in that order. <Instruction for Supply> Open Knob : EM-30L (DY9-3031-000)
Note on Reassembling (1),(2) Cassette Cover Dowel E Double Sided Tape Dowel G Connector Dowel F
SPEAKER FPC
Claw C
Speaker
Claw D
Note on Reassembling (3) Zoom Photo Key Ass'y
Instruction for Supply Open Knob Lower Part Open Knob
EM-30L
Dowel B
Claw A
Fig. 22
25

(1) Open the Cassette Cover, detach the Regulation Sheet, and remove one screw (h 1), and theL Cover Cushion. Note : Since the Double Sided Tape has a high strength of adhesion, take care not to flaw the Regulation Sheet when detaching it. (2) Remove two screws (d 1, t 1), UL Tape and detach the Left Cover Shield. (3) Disengage the dowels A (two points) and the claw B. Then, demount the Speaker, and the SPEAKER FPC. (4) Detach the Speaker Cushion. (5) Remove solder () (two points), and separate the Speaker from the SPEAKER FPC.
(5) -
SPEAKER FPC (3) UL Tape (9 30)
(4) Speaker Speaker Cushion (3) (2) (1) Regulation Sheet
(1) - h Claw B Claw C Dowel A (1) (2) (2) - t
L Cover Cushion
Left Cover Shield
(2) - d
d
3mm Metal M1.7
h
3.5mm Metal M1.7
t
4.5mm Black M1.7 (self tap) Fig. 23
26
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Speaker Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below. (2) Attach the SPEAKER FPC to the position indicated in the figure below, and secure it with the claw C of the Left Cover Shield. (3) Attach the L Cover Cushion as illustrated below. (4) Attach the UL Tape as illustrated below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Speaker Cushion
Note on Reassembling (2) When attaching the SPEAKER FPC, engage the dowels A and claw B.
Note on Reassembling (3) Attachment reference
Speaker
Attach the Speaker Cushion along the outline of the metallic part of the Speaker. Allowable deviation in attachment : 0.5mm
L Cover Cushion Dowel A Claw B Secure with the claw C. Left Cover
The root of the flexible cable shall be attached to meet the internal radius of the cover. UL Tape (9 30) After attaching the UL tape, make sure that the FPC is not kinky. (To prevent deviation of the outward position of the FPC) In the range D, the dimensions indicated in the figure shall be satisfied. 0 5.0mm
0 5.0mm
Fig. 24
27

(1) Remove four screws (d 1, t 3), and detach the Cassette Arm Assy, Grip Hook Pin, and Grip Hook. (2) Remove one screw (d 1), and detach the Click Spring. (3) Detach the GND Tape1, 2 and the Cassette Arm Sheet.
Left Cover
GND Tape 2 (1) - d Dowel A (2) - d Click Spring GND Tape 1 (3) (3) (1) (1) - t (1) Grip Hook Cassette Arm Ass'y Grip Hook Pin (1) (1) - t (3) (2)
d
3mm Metal M1.7
t
4.5mm Black M1.7 (self tap)
(1) - t Cassette Arm Sheet
Fig. 25
28
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the GND Tape1 to the position indicated in the figure below. (2) Attach the GND Tape2 to the position indicated in the figure below. (3) Attach the Click Spring and the Cassette Arm Sheet as illustrated below. (4) With the Cassette Arm Assy open, attach it to the dowel A of the Left Cover and then secure the screw. <Instruction for Supply> Click Spring, two dented spherical points : Hanal FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)
Note on Reassembling (1) Left Cover Attach the GND Tape1 so that it is secured to the concave part of the Left Cover. (The GND Tape1 shall not be unseated.)
Note on Reassembling (3) Click Spring Cassette Arm Ass'y GND Tape1 Cassette Arm Sheet Stopper Attach according to the outline of the Cassette Arm Ass'y. No interference with the Stopper shall occur at the time of turning. Allowable deviation of attachment : 0.5 mm.
Note on Reassembling (2) Fold the hatched part to the back side. (Fold through an angle 180 according to the shape of the cutout.)
GND Tape 2
Allowable deviation in attachment, unless otherwise specified : 0.5 mm. Align with the end face of the left cover. (Protrusion is not allowed.) Align the cutout part with the stepped part of the left cover. (Protrusion is not allowed.)
Instruction for Supply
Click Spring
Hanal FL-778
Fig. 26
29
1-21 Disassembly of R-LCD Unit - 1

(1) Remove one screw (f 1), and detach the Rubber Insulation and the Tripod Base. (2) Remove one screw (e 1), and detach the Hold Label and the GND Plate. (3) Remove one screw (f 1), disengage the claws A and B, and detach the LI Case. <Notes on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Hold Label to the position indicated in the figure below.
Hold Label (1)
GND Plate
Tripod Base
Craw A
(1)
(2) (2) - e (2)
(1) - f
(3) Craw B
Rubber Insulation
LI Case (3) - f GND Plate Hold Label
e
f
Fig. 27
30

(1) While being free from the GND Plate, disengage the dowels A and B and the claw C. Then, disconnect the CN102, and detach the KEY P.C.B. <Note on Reassembling> (1) With the LCD Unit open, attach the KEY P.C.B. to the dowels A and B and the claw C. (Take care not to damage the Switch part.)
GND Plate
LCD Unit (1)
Claw C Dowel A
KEY P.C.B.
(1)
Dowel B CN102 KEY P.C.B. Note on Reassembling (1) Dowel A GND Plate
Claw C
Switch part
KEY P.C.B.
Dowel B
Fig. 28
31

(1) Remove two screws (f 2), and detach the Hinge Cover, the GND Plate and the LCD Unit. (Turn the Hinge part of the LCD Unit through an angle of 90 beforehand.) <Note on Reassembling> (1) To the Right Cover Unit, attach the GND Plate, the LCD Unit and the Hinge Cover in that order, and secure then with the screws. In reassembling, run the LCD FPC through part A of the Hinge Cover.
LCD Unit
A
(1)
(1)
GND Plate
(1) - f
(1) Right Cover Unit Note on Reassembling (1) Hinge Cover
(1) - f
Hinge Cover
f
Part A LCD FPC
Fig. 29
32
1-24 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit

(1) Detach the LED Guide. (2) Open the Card Cover, disengage the dowel A, and detach the Card Cover Hook. (3) Pull out the Shaft, and detach the Card Cover. Note : Take sufficient care not to lose the Shaft. (4) Introduce tweezers of thin end into the part B, and detach the Blindfold Sheet. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Card Cover Hook as illustrated below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Card Cover Hook
(4)
Part B
Dowel A
Blindfold Sheet
Blindfold Sheet
Right Cover Ass'y
Press in, and then pull out
(3)
Shaft
Card Cover Hook LED Guide (1) Dowel A (3) (2) (2)
Card Cover
Fig. 30
33
1-25 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1

(1) Turn the LCD Hinge Unit through an angle of 90, and remove two screws (g 2). (2) Disengage the claws A, B, C and D in that order, and detach the LCD Top Cover. Note : Take care not to damage the claw hooking parts E and F of the LCD Bottom Cover. (3) Disconnect the CN901 and CN903, and then detach the LCD Hinge Unit and the LCD DETECT FPC. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the LCD Top Cover as illustrated below.
LCD DETECT FPC
(3)
(1) (3)
CN903
(3)
LCD Hinge Unit (3) Claw A (1) - g (2) CN901 (1) - g Claw C F E
LCD Top Cover Claw D Claw B Note on Reassembling (1)
g
4mm Metal M1.7
Insert the IC part of the DETECT FPC into the groove. Fold a surplus part of the flexible cable inside.
Fig. 31
34
1-26 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2

(1) Remove solder () (three points), disconnect the LCD Sheet, UL Tape, CN902. Then, detach the LCD P.C.B., the LCD Holder, the Back Light Assy, and the LCD Assy. (2) Disengage the claw A, and detach the LCD Open Knob, the Shaft, and the Spring.
LCD Ass'y
LCD Bottom Cover
Claw A Back Light Ass'y
LCD Holder LCD Sheet
(1)
(1) LCD P.C.B. (1) - UL Tape (1) LCD Sheet (1) (1) (1)
Spring
(2)
LCD Open Knob
Shaft (1) - (1)
CN902 (1) -
Fig. 32
35
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) At the end of reassembling, solder three points (). (2) While holding the Shaft and Spring, attach the LCD Open Knob over the claw A. (3) Attach the LCD Sheet and UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Solder
Shaft Fold the lead wire inside, and perform soldering. Spring Claw A LCD Open Knob
Solder
Note on Reassembling (3) UL Tape (The tape may have an arbitrary width.) LCD Sheet LCD Sheet
Attach with reference to the plate end of the LCD Holder, and fold a surplus part.
Guideline for attaching UL Tape. Conceal the holes Be sure to cover
part.
LCD Sheet LCD Sheet Attach in alignment with the plate end of the LCD panel (four sheets). Attach with reference to the plate end of the LCD panel, and fold a surplus part (upper, lower).
Fig. 33
36
1-27 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit

(1) Remove one screw (o 1), disengage the claws A and B, and detach the Hinge Top Cover, the Hinge Bottom Cover, and the Magnet. (2) Detach the LCD-KEY FPC from the LCD Hinge Assy. <Note on Reassembling> (1) When using the service part LCD-KEY FPC, put 1 and 2, 3 and 4, and 5 and 6 on each other in a paired form, and secure them with the Double Sided Tape on the FPC. Then, fold 7 and 8, and secure them with the Double Sided Tape on the FPC. (2) Wind the LCD-KEY FPC 2 and 1/4 turns from the state illustrated below. (3) Attach the Magnet so that the painted side (black) will be oriented as shown in the figure below. <Instruction for Supply> LCD winding part : Hanal FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)
Note on Reassembling (1) Double Sided Tape LCD-KEY FPC Double Sided Tape 5 7 Double Sided Tape 6
Instruction for Supply
1 2
3 4 Fold line
Allowable deviation of attachment from outline: 0.5 mm. 8 Folded part Double Sided Tape Note on Reassembling (2)
Hanal FL-778
o
Wind 2-1/4 turns
LCD-KEY FPC
Claw A Claw B (1) - o (2) (1) (1) Hinge Bottom Cover
Hinge Top Cover (1) Magnet Paint side (Black)

Fig. 34
LCD Hinge Ass'y
37
1-28 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 1

(1) Remove two screws (n 1, p 1), and detach the Grip Belt Plate, the Shaft, and the Grip Belt. (2) Remove three screws (e 3), and detach the Battery Terminal Assy. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Attach the Battery Terminal Assy as illustrated below.
Grip Belt
(1)
Shaft Grip Belt Plate (1) (1) - p (1) (1) - n (2)
Note on Reassembling (1) Run the cable through two hooks. Battery Terminal Ass'y
(2) - e
Battery Terminal Ass'y
e
n
4.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap)
p
Black
Yellow
Red
Fig. 35
38
1-29 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 2

(1) Remove three screws (n 2, q 1), and detach the Power Switch Assy. (2) Remove one screw (n 1), and detach the Strap Plate. (3) Remove one screw (n 1), and detach the Eject Holder, the Spring, and the Eject Knob. Note : Take care not to lose the Spring. <Instruction for Supply> Entire surface of Spring : Hanal FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)
Instruction for Supply Spring
Strap Plate
Rear Cover (2) Hanal FL-778 (2) - n
Power Switch Ass'y
(1) - q (1) (1) - n
(3)
(3) - n Spring (1) - n Eject Holder
Eject Knob
n
q
Fig. 36
39
1-30 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 1

(1) Detach the UL Tape from the CAV-CVF FPC, and turn up the CVF. (2) Detach the FPC Holder. Note : When detaching the FPC Holder, take the following steps. 1. Disengage the claw A. 2. Using tweezers or the like, disengage the claw B from the back side. Detach the FPC Holder while sliding it. At this step, take care not to damage the flexible cable. (3) Detach the Dust Cover. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Secure the CAV-CVF FPC with the UL Tape as illustrated below.
(3) Dust Cover
(1)
UL Tape (13 50)
(2)
CVF Hinge Ass'y
FPC Holder Claw B Claw A
Note
Claw A
Claw B
FPC Holder
Fig. 37
CAV-CVF FPC
UL Tape (13 50)
40

(1) Remove two screws (k 2), and detach the CVF Bottom Cover and the CVF Click Plate. Note : Disengage the dowel A, and detach the CVF Click Plate while sliding it. (2) Remove one screw (e 1), and detach the CVF Click Spring. (3) Detach the CVF Inner part. Note : Using tweezers or the like, detach the CVF Inner part while pushing it upward as illustrated below.
(2) - e Note CVF Click Spring (2) CVF Click Plate
Dowel A
(1) - k CVF Inner Part (3) (1)
CVF Bottom Cover Note Pull out Push UP Tweezers
e
4mm Metal M1.7 (self tap) Fig. 38
k
2.5mm Metal M1.7
41
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E DISASSEMBLING <Note on Reassembling> (1) When attaching the CVF Bottom Cover, push the CAV-CVF FPC inside as illustrated below. <Instruction for Supply> CVF Click Plate : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000) Rail part of CVF Top Cover, two points : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000) Inside-wall rail part of CVF Top Cover, four points : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Instruction for Supply CVF Top Cover's inner wall rail parts Hanarl KS-39M
CVF Click Plate Hanal KS-39M
CVF Top Cover's rail parts Hanarl KS-39M
CAV-CVF FPC
Push in
CVF Bottom Cover
Fig. 39
42

(1) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CVF Inner Bottom Cover Assy. (2) Remove two screws (k 2), and detach the CVF Hinge Unit. <Notes on Reassembling> (1) Attach the CVF Inner Bottom Cover Assy as illustrated below.
CVF Inner Bottom Cover Ass'y
(2) - k
Claw A (1)
CVF Top Cover (2)
k
2.5mm Metal M1.7
CVF Hinge Unit
Note on Reassembling (1) Eye Piece Claw A First engage the Eye Piece side (claw B) and engage the claw A. Running CVF FPC between the ribs.
CVF FPC
Claw B
Fig. 40
43

(1) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CAV-CVF FPC, the CVF Mask, and the other parts between them. (2) Disengage two claws B, and detach the CVF Reflector from the CVF P.C.B. (3) Disconnect the CN4101 and CN4102, and detach the CAV-CVF FPC and the CVF Assy. <Note on Reassembling> (1) When mounting the CVF Reflector, push the CVF Mask, CVF Assy, Cushion and Diffuser lightly in the arrow direction. (2) Insert the CVF Assy flexible cable under the rib of the CVF Inner Cover as illustrated below.
CVF Inner Cover
CAV-CVF FPC Claws A CVF Mask CVF Ass'y (3) (3) CN4102 Diffuser (2) Claw B CN4101 CVF Reflector Cushion
CVF P.C.B. Claw B
CVF Reflector Part Note on Reassembling (2) Ribs
Push in
Fig. 41
44

(1) Remove one screw (r 1), and detach the CVF Knob, Rubber, and CVF Lens Holder. (2) Disengage two claws A, and detach the Lens1 and Lens2. <Note on Reassembling> (1) When attaching the Lens1 and Lens2 to the CVF Lens Holder, take care not to mistake the orientation of the Lens1/Lens2. (2) When attaching the CVF Knob, engage the dowel of the CVF Lens Holder as illustrated below. Take care not to forget to attach the Rubber. <Instruction for Supply> CVF Inner Cover inside, 8 points on sliding rail part : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000) Rubber top surface : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
(1) - r Lens 2 CVF Knob Lens 1 CVF Lens Holder
(1)
Rubber (2)
r
(1)
Claw A
Note on Reassembling (1) CVF Lens Holder
CVF Inner Cover
CVF Inner Cover Note on Reassembling (2) CVF Knob Rubber top surface Rubber Instruction for Supply
Lens 1
Lens 2
Sliding parts of rail
Hanal : KS-39M CVF Lens Holder Sliding parts of rail
Fig. 42
45
1-35 Disassembly of Camera Unit

(1) Detach the CCD-CAV FPC from the CN1070. (2) Remove two screws (f 2), and detach the CCD P.C.B., CCD Assy, Rubber, and IR Filter. (3) Unsolder the parts A, and detach the CCD Assy from the CCD P.C.B. <Notes on Reassembling> (1) When soldering on the CCD P.C.B., secure the CCD Assy and the CCD P.C.B. with two screws (f 2).
Lens Unit
IR Filter Rubber CCD Ass'y CCD P.C.B. CCD - CAV FPC CN1070
f
(2) (3)
(1)
(1) - f
Lens
(3) Face thick side toward CCD side
Parts A
CCD IR Filter CCD P.C.B.
Fig. 43
46
1-36 Disassembly of Lens Unit

(1) Remove seven screws (n 3, p 2, s 2), and detach the IG Meter Assy. (2) Unsolder the part (), and detach the PZ Motor and AF Motor. <Note on Reassembling> (1) Run the flexible cable through the groove of part A.
(2) -
(1) - p
(1) - p
(1) - n (2) -
PZ Motor
(2) (2) - AF Motor
(2)
(1)
(2) - (1) - s
Note on Reassembling (1) IG Meter Ass'y (1) - n
n
p
s
4.5mm Metal M1.7 (self tap) Fig. 44
47
1-37 List of Screws Used

SYMBOL SYMBOL
PARTS NO.
PARTS NO. Flat Head Screw M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)
ILLUST
PARTS NO.
REMARKS
ILLUST
XA1-3170-507
5mm
XA1-7170-257
M1.7-2.5mm (Metal)
2.5mm
XA1-7170-507
M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)
5mm
DA3-1026-000
Steped Screw M1.7-4.5mm (Metal) Steped Screw M1.7-3.4mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-4.5mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-9.0mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-3.5mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-5.5mm (Metal) Steped Screw M1.7-2.3mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-4.5mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-4.5mm Black 2.3mm 5.5mm 4.5mm 3.4mm 4.5mm
XA1-7170-607
M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)
6mm
m XA9-1167-000
XA1-7170-307
M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)
3mm
XA4-9170-457
XA4-9170-407
Self Tap M1.7-4.0mm (Metal) Self Tap M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)
4mm
XA4-9170-907
9mm
XA4-9170-507
5mm
XA4-9170-357
3.5mm
XA1-7170-407
M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)
4mm
XA4-9170-557
XA1-7170-357
M1.7-3.5mm (Metal)
3.5mm
XA9-1166-000
XA1-7170-557
M1.7-5.5mm (Metal)
5.5mm
XA4-5170-457
4.5mm
XA1-7170-207
M1.7-2.0mm (Metal)
2mm
XA4-9170-459
4.5mm
48
1-38 List of Disassembly Photos
Right Side
Top Side
Front Side
Camera / Recorder Unit
Camera Unit
Front Cover Unit
49
Left Cover Unit
Right Cover Unit
Rear Cover Unit
LCD Unit
50
SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT

CONTENTS
1. Maintenance Tools ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 List of Maintenance Tools -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 2. Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 2-1 Using the Extension Connectors ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2 2-2 Setting A ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 2-3 Setting B ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 3. Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5 3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5 3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 3-4 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 4. Description of Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8 4-1 Error Rate --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 4-2 Mechanical Error Indication ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9 4-2-1 Mechanical Error Normal Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 4-3 Cleaning Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-4 Commands Particular to Camera ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 4-6-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 4-6-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12 4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 5. Adjustment Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 14 5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 5-1-1 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 16 5-2 AF Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 5-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 5-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19 5-3 IS Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 5-3-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 5-3-2 Gyro Gain Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 20 5-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 5-4 Camera Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 5-4-1 Iris Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 5-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 5-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23 5-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23 5-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 5-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 5-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 5-5-1 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation (AUTO) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 5-6 CVF Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 26 5-6-1 Forced CVF ON ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 5-6-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 5-6-3 Contrast Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 5-6-4 Brightness Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 28
5-6-5 Black Limiter Level Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 29 5-6-6 COM Amplitude Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30 5-6-7 COM-DC Level Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31 5-6-8 Flash Memory Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32 5-6-9 Release of Forced CVF ON ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 32 5-7 Color Balance Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 33 5-8 Recorder Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34 5-8-0 LCD PCB Setting Destination --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34 5-8-1 SWP Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 34 5-8-2 C. FG Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34 5-8-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35 5-8-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35 5-8-5 Flash Memory Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35 5-9 Tape Path Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT
1. Maintenance Tools
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools
Item Name Alignment T ape, (Color bar master/PAL) Alignment T ape (tracking) Cassette T orque Gauge for DV DV Cleaning T ape (hard) Driver bit for tape path adjustment Color bar chart Color Viewer 5600 K for 220V Color Viewer 5600 K for 240V Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K Filter, CCA W1246mm Cassette for changeover to service mode Extension Flexible cable (24pin) Extension connector (24 pins) Item Number Purpose Remarks DMC III DMC III DMC III DMC III DY9-1381-000 Recorder electrical adjustment DY9-1379-000 Running adjustment DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DY9-1384-000 Head cleaning DY9-2053-000 T ape path adjustment DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment DY9-2039-220 Camera electrical adjustment (for 220) DY9-2039-240 Camera electrical adjustment (for 240) DY9-2040-000 Replacement DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment DY9-1386-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment DY9-1390-000 T est pin extended DY9-1395-000 T est pin extended NEW
2. Setting
(1) Adjustments other than DMC-III : Perform adjustments in the product state. (2) Tracking adjustment (DMC-III) and Envelope check : Perform them with the Setting A. (3) Adjustments related to DMC-III other than Tracking adjustment, tape path system check and tape path system cleaning : Perform them with the Setting B.
2-1 Using the Extension Connectors

(1) Attach the two extension connectors (DY9-1395-000) to the extension flexible cable (DY9-1390-000)
Important Secure the two connectors with tape as shown in the figure. (When removing the extension connector assembly from the main unit after use, the connector coupling may be detached in some cases. If the connector located on the main unit side comes off, it becomes impossible to remove it from the main unit. To prevent this, secure the connectors with tape beforehand.)
(2) Detach the blindfold sheet. (3) Connect the extension connectors to the CN2900. <Signals used> Pin No. 2 3 15 19 Signal Designation EVF HD GND SWP PBRF Pin No. 21 22 23 24 Signal Designation EVF R EVF COM EVF G EVF B Fig. 1
BLINDFOLD SHEET
DY9-1390-000 DY9-1395-000
DY9-1395-000
Secure with tape.
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
2-2 Setting A
Envelope observation)
(1) Observe a PB-RF signal output from each extension connector that has been attached in 2-1 Using the Extension Connectors.
Tracking Adjustment)
(1) Detach the regulation cover. * : To avoid flawing the regulation cover, detach it from the inside of the left cover as illustrated.
REGULATION COVER REGULATION COVER LEFT COVER
Fig. 4
(2) While observing a PB-RF signal, adjust the post to eliminate fluctuations of the envelope. Note : When the tracking adjustment is going to be performed, refer to 5-9 Tape Path Adjustment on p.36.
ADJUSTMENT DRIVER (DY9-2053-000)
Fig. 5
2-3 Setting B
(1) Remove the FRONT COVER, REAR COVER, LEFT COVER UNIT, RIGHT COVER UNIT referring to Disassembling. Note 1 : Referring to Fig.5, connect the required cables. Note 2 : Observe the signal in the same manner as that for setting A. Note 3 : For ejection, use the switch concerned on the P.C.B. For mode transition, use the wireless remote controller.
MONITOR TV JACK2 P.C.B. EJECT SWITCH WIRELESS CONTROLLER
CA-570
MAIN P.C.B. CN3201 REAR COVER UNIT
JACK1 P.C.B. CN51 JACK1 P.C.B. CN3211 FRONT COVER UNIT
MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. CN100 CN101 JACK1 P.C.B. CN51
LEFT COVER UNIT
MAIN P.C.B. CN3201
FRONT COVER UNIT JACK1 P.C.B. CN3211
REAR COVER UNIT MAIN P.C.B. CN2101 MAIN P.C.B. CN101
Fig. 6
3. Service Modes
3-1 Outline
(1) The service mode in this equipment uses the wireless remote controller. (To be used in remote control code 2) (2) For changeover to the service mode, a dedicated tool (CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE: DY9-1386-000) is required in addition to the wireless remote controller. (3) Mode changeover is available between the service mode and the normal mode using the Audio dubbing and SLOW keys of the wireless remote controller. As long as power is ON, the service mode is available even if the CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE is removed. (4) In the service mode, changeover of the main unit operation mode can be handled using the keys on the main unit and the remote control mode 1. (5) In the service mode, safety functions such as for mechanical error detection, DEW detection and low voltage detection are canceled. (6) In the service mode, the LCD mirror function is canceled.
3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode

(1) Set the cassette for changeover to service mode (DY9-1386000) in the equipment and load the data. (2) Press the Dubbing key on the wireless remote controller that is set at Remote controller code 2. * To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press Remote controller setting and Zoom T keys simultaneously for 2 sec. * The remote controller code setting on the DVC main unit is operable both at remote controller codes 1 and 2. (3) Now the changeover to the service mode has been completed and the SERVICE MODE appears on the screen. * Pressing the SLOW key performs the changeover to the normal mode from the service mode. As long as the power supply is ON, the service mode is available by setting the Audio dubbing key even if the cassette for transfer to service mode is removed. Fig. 7
DY9-1386-000
Fig. 8
3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode

(1) To use the wireless remote controller in the service mode, set it at Remote controller code 2. * To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press the Remote controller setting and Zoom T keys simultaneously for 2 sec.
4. SERCH + 3. START/STOP 5. SEARCH 11. PLAY 8. FF 6. FRAME + 9. REW 12. STOP 7. FRAME 1. DUBBING 2. SLOW 13. PAUSE 14. 2
10. SERCH SELECT
Remote Controller Code 2 setting
Fig. 9
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Key Designation (in Normal Mode) DUBBING SLOW START/STOP SEARCH + SEARCH FRAME + FRAME FF REW SEARCH SELECT PLAY STOP PAUSE 2
Key Designation (in Service Mode) SERVICE MODE NORMAL MODE CS+ FUNCTION + FUNCTION HIGH ADDRESS + HIGH ADDRESS ADDRESS + ADDRESS MODE SELECT DATA + DATA STORE EJECT
Function Change over to service mode Change over to normal mode Increases CS by 1. Increases FUNCTION by 1. Decreases FUNCTION by 1. Increases HIGH ADDRESS by 1. Decreases HIGH ADDRESS by 1. Increases ADDRESS by 1. Decreases ADDRESS by 1. Change over to RD/WR mode Increases DATA by 1. Decreases DATA by 1. Defines/w rites DATA. Performs EJECT.
3-4 Indication in Service Mode

Shown below are the indications in the service mode.
4 1 2 3 7
18
10 11 12 13 14 15
16
Fig. 10 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Indicates that the service mode is currently selected. (SERV) MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)
17
Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA,MD, CA, CD, etc.) CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F) Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF) ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF) DT : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF) Indicates the mechanical status. (POPUP, STBY, LOAD1, LOAD2, STOP, PLAY)
9. Indicates the absolute track No. 10. Indicates the mechanical error. (Main power supply backup) 11. Indicates mechanical error history (LITHIUM 3V battery backup) 12. Indicates the version of the MAIN program in the FR MI-COM. 13. Indicates the version of the MODE MI-COM. 14. Indicates the version of the CAMERA program in the FR MI-COM. 15. Indicates the version of the CARD program in the FR MI-COM. 16. E0 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH0 (Low ch) head. 17. E1 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH1 (High ch) head. 18. Data Write status (00: READ mode, 04 : Write preparation, OC : Write execution)
4. Description of Service Modes

4-1 Error Rate
<Generals>
(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked. (2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.
<How to read a VIDEO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indicated in exponential representation. Example) 25 is indicated: Error rate = 210 -5
Low ch.
EO 2 5 E1
High ch.
2 10
Fig. 11
-5
<How to read an AUDIO error rate>

To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in the table below. The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits. (FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.) Example) 23is indicated: Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35
Low ch.
AO 2 3 A1
High ch.
2 3
(hexadecimal)
In the product specifications, the error rate on both channels in self -recording LP playback is as follows : Error rate =28H or less (Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less)
( 2 16)+ 3 = 35 (decimal)
Fig. 12
Important After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.)
<Change to an AUDIO error rate>

ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) Function MONIT OR ADDR MODE DT Microcomputer operation
0 10 001D ST 00 03 Product setting RD 03 Audio error rate indication Remarks) Selecting DT back to "0"makes a return to Audio + Video error rate.
4-2 Mechanical Error Indication

<Outline>
(1) On occurrence of a mechanical error, the conditions of the error can be checked in the service mode. (Normal indication mode and analysis mode available) (2) In the normal indication mode of the mechanical error, two types of indications appear on the service mode initial screen: the data indication retained only by the main battery and the error history data indication backed up by LITHIUM 3V. (3) The data backed up by the LITHIUM 3V can be reset by the STEP-1 operation shown below.
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 0 Function 08 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 0008 ST RD DT 00 Completion of backup data resetting Microcomputer operation
4-2-1 Mechanical Error Normal Mode
Relevant errors are highlighted in purple.
E : TAPE END B : TAPE TOP D : DRUM ERROR C : CAPSTAN ERROR S : S-REEL ERROR T : T- REEL ERROR L : LOADING MTR ERROR D : DEW ERROR
Fig. 13
4-3 Cleaning Mode

When cleaning the head with hard-type cleaning tape (DY9-1384-000), set up the cleaning mode according to the procedure given below. Note :
ST EP 1
After head cleaning, be sure to restore the settings to normal.

PROCEDURE CS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Increases DT by 2. (Change bit-02 to 1 from 0.) (Example: 80 82) 3) Perform ST ORE. (Press PAUSE key. RD 1) Change over to the normal mode and turn OFF the power supply. -Completion of cleaning mode setup Resetting of cleaning mode 0 Function 10 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 0111 ST DT --Microcomputer operation
4-4 Commands Particular to Camera

<Outline>
(1) The commands particular to camera are provided for checking the operation. (2) Make preparation according to the table below and carry out the desired commands particular to camera. (3) To restore any setting back to the original status, press the PAUSE key (STORE) for each item again in the ST mode. Turning the power OFF/ON resets all the settings.
ST EP WB SET WB LOCK WB T URBO WB WB INDOOR IRIS OPEN IRIS CLOSE ND ON ND OFF AGC MAX AGC MIN COLOR BAR White 100% White 50% PROCEDURE CAM SPECIAL COMMAND 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) 1) Make setting shown at right. 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) CS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Function 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 330A 330B 330C 330D ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ST RD DT ----------------------------Outputs white 50% from DIGIC DV. Outputs white 100% from DIGIC DV. Outputs color bar from DIGIC DV. A value of AGC gain is minimized. A value of AGC gain is maximized. ND in standby state ND inserted T he iris is closed forcibly. T he iris is opened forcibly. WB indoor mode WB outdoor mode WB high-speed setting mode WB is locked. WB is set. Microcomputer operation
OUT DOOR 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.)
10
4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting

<Generals>
(1) Set up addresses according to the table shown below. Thus, using data marked with the arrows in the figure below, you can check whether lens resetting has been completed or not. * In case of 40 or 44, the zoom lens has not yet been reset. * In case of 80 or 84, the focus lens has not yet been reset.
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE CS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 Function 00 MONIT OR ADDR MODE 8300 RD DT -RAM data indication Microcomputer operation
Fig. 14
11
4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches

<Generals>
(1) The MODE and FR MI-COM terminals can be checked in the service mode. With this function, the key-related operations and the connections between the keys and the MI-COM terminals can be checked in the product state. (2) Perform the check in the RD mode.
4-6-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port

PIN 25 42 43 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 75 76 77 78 80 82 NAME Li3V Detect Dial CCW Switch Dial CW Switch PANEL Open Switch PANEL Bottom/T op Switch Eject Switch Cassette In Switch Photo Switch Half Photo Switch ST ART ST OP DC J DET PAE/GREEN SW VT R Power Switch CAM Power Switch T /C PW SW DC V DET KEY AD4 Description Detection of decrease in lithium battery voltage Select Dial Select Dial LCD open detection LCD reverse detection EJECT SW detection Cassette IN SW detection Full pressing of Photo SW Halfway pressing of Photo SW Start / Stop SW DC JACK detection P.AE/GREEN SW POWER SW (VCR) POWER SW (CAMERA) T ape/Card SW Input voltage from DC jack REC PAUSE KEY CS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Function 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 ADDR 0007 0005 0005 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0000 0000 DATA BIT 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 3 2 1 0 6 4
4-6-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port

PIN 95 93 92 91 88 87 NAME KEY AD3 KEY AD2 KEY AD1 KEY AD0 Batt Info A/D Batt A/D Description KEY AD 3 KEY AD 2 KEY AD 1 KEY AD 0 Battery temperature detection Battery voltage detection CS 1 1 1 1 1 1 Function 02 02 02 02 02 02 ADDR 0000 0001 0002 0003 0006 0007 AD DATA (00FF) MENU(00) SET (40) ST OP(00) PLAY(40) FF(85) DE ON/OFF(00) DE SEL. (40) AE(85) D.CODE(00) C.MIX(40) REW(85) Low(FF) High(00) Low(00) High(FF)
12
4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port

PIN P6 W1 X5 E3 U6 SDET USB DET CARD DET REC PROOF CARD PRO NAME Description S JACK detection USB Detect CARD detection T ape recording inhibition Card recording inhibited CS 0 0 0 0 0 Function 01 01 01 01 01 ADDR 0000 0009 0009 000A 000A DATA BIT 5 5 4 7 2
4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port

PIN AA16 NAME ZOOMKEY Description Zoom key output CS 0 Function 02 ADDR 0002 T ELE side 0003 0004 0005 0006 000A 000B 000C Small diaphragm Open AD DATA (00FF) Intermediate WIDE side
AC17 X15 AB16 Y15 AA15 AC15 Y14
T EMP Y GYRO P GYRO I ENC MSW AD DEW CAS IN
Lens thermometer output YAW side GYRO output PIT CH side GYRO output IRIS ENC output Mechanical position DEW detection Cassette detection
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
02 02 02 02 02 02 02
Cassette inserted
Cassette not inserted
AC14 AA14 AB14
WIDE DET T APE T OP T APE END
Wide signal detection Beginning detection Ending detection
0 0 0
02 02 02
000D 000E 000F
13
5. Adjustment Procedures
5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement
After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows minimum required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any faulty condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.
: Adjustment required Part name No. Adjustment item Lens 5-2 AF section 5-2-1 5-2-2 5-3 IS section 5-3-1 5-3-2 5-3-3 Gyro Offset Adjustment Gyro Gain Check Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing Product condition Product condition Product condition CZ Automatic Adjustment Cam Correction (AUT O) Product condition Product condition JACK1 PCB CCD CVF MAIN CAV PCB PCB Adjustment setting
Camera system
5-4 Camera section 5-4-1 5-4-2 5-4-3 5-4-4 5-4-5 5-4-6 5-5 Iris Adjustment WB Adjustment (1) Color Balance Adjustment WB Adjustment (2) WB Adjustment (3) Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing CCD Pixel Missing Compensation Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition
5-6 CVF Adjustment 5-6-1 5-6-2 5-6-3 5-6-4 5-6-5 5-6-6 5-6-7 5-6-8 5-6-9 5-7 Forced CVF ON CVF Frequency Adjustment Contrast Adjustment Brightness Adjustment Black Limiter Level Adjustment COM Amplitude Adjustment COM-DC Level Adjustment Flash Memory Writing Release of Forced CVF ON Color Balance Check Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition
14

Recorder system Part name No. Adjustment item MAIN PCB DMC III Adjustment setting
5-8 Recorder section 5-8-0 5-8-1 5-8-2 5-8-3 5-8-4 5-8-5 DMC III 5-9 T ape Path Adjustment T ape path adjustment setting LCD PCB Setting Destination SWP Adjustment C. FG Adjustment Automatiac Adjustment of Reel FG Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment Flash Memory Writing Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition Product condition
15
5-1-1 Indication in Service Mode

Shown below are the indications in the service mode.
10
11
12
13
Fig. 15 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST) Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA, MD, CA, CD, etc.) CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F) Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF) ADDR DT : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF) : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF)
Data write status (0 : Read mode, 1 : Ready to write, C : Write execution) ST : Adjustment status (02: During adjustment, 05: Adjustment OK, 09: Adjustment NG) ST2 : Adjustment status (for use in AF adjustment)
At the time of IS adjustment 10. IS1 : Yaw Gyro gain 11. IS2 12. IS3 13. IS4 : Pitch Gyro gain : Yaw Gyro offset : Pitch Gyro offset
16
5-2 AF Section Adjustment

Note)
(1) The sections 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If they are performed independently, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained. Also, when section 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed immediately without elapse of time. If execute section 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed after elapse of time upon completion of section 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.
Preparation)
(1) For CZ automatic adjustment/cam correction, set the product condition. (2) Adjustment condition (initial condition) Tape/Card Program AE : Tape : Auto Mode
ZOOM : Telephoto-end CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 0.02 m from lens front Chart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)
17
5-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment

CHART SPEC. CZ adjustment chart At STEP 3, DT : AA should be attained. Execution of STEP 4.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV. (2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode. (3) Perform the cam correction.
MONIT OR ST EP PROCEDURE CZ CS Function MD ADDR 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3100 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) 2 2) Perform storing. 2 08 ST 3100 (press the PAUSE button.) Microcomputer operation DT 00 - Automatic adjustment is started. T hen, it is completed in 30 seconds approximately. If any NG condition is encountered in automatic adjustment, check the parts inside the lens section. AA Adjustment is completed (result is OK). Perform the cam correction. FF Adjustment is completed (result is NG). T ake the procedure again from the beginning. Preparation for flash memory updating. Execution of flash memory updating. ST 2 Move to adjustment mode.
Judgment on result of adjustment
08 08
RD RD ST RD
3100 0081 -
1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)
ST2
Fig. 16
18
5-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO)

CHART SPEC. CZ adjustment chart Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Quit the service mode, and turn power OFF/ON. (2) Perform the cam correction by following the table below. (3) Quit the service mode, turn power off/on, and then check that proper focusing can be attained in normal zooming operation (AF OFF). (4) If the result is NG, perform 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO).
ST EP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation MONIT OR CAM CORRECT ION CS Function MD ADDR DT ST 2 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3101 00 2) Perform storing. RD 01 (press the PAUSE button.) 2 Cancel the service mode, and set the zoom position to the telephoto end. After focus movement is stopped, turn OFF the AF function. 3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3202 -WR 2) Perform storing. RD 02 Correction value measurement. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST 2:02. 4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3104 -2) Perform storing. RD 04 Correction value calculation. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST 2:04. 5 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3105 -2) Perform storing. RD AA Completion of correction value writing. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST 2:AA. 6 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0081 -Preparation for flash memory updating. 2) Perform storing. RD Execution of flash memory updating. (press the PAUSE button.)
19
5-3 IS Section Adjustment

Note)
(1) Perform the IS adjustment after machine is re-assembled to a product status. (2) Prepare a tripod or stable work bench. (3) Each of the adjustment data (5-3-1, 2) becomes valid when 5-3-3 data writing is made. After completion of each adjustment, be sure to carry out 5-3-3 before turning power OFF.
5-3-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment

SPEC. Automatic adjusutment
Procedure)
(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera. (2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.
Note)
It will take approx. 25 seconds at maximum to complete adjustment (OK) after storing (pressing the pause button).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 320D 00 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Microcomputer operation ST 05 Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 After adjustment, data is indicated at IS3 and IS4.
5-3-2 Gyro Gain Check Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out data checkup.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 RD 320D -2) Check data. Microcomputer operation ST Check that IS1 = IS2 = 88.
IS1 : Yaw Gyro gain IS2 : Pitch Gyro gain IS3 : Yaw Gyro offset IS4 : Pitch Gyro offset
ST IS1 IS2 IS3 IS4 Fig. 17
20
5-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (5-3-1) into the virtual EEPROM and flash memory.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR EEPROM & FLASH WRIT ING CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 320F 00 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0081 -2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Microcomputer operation ST 05 Completion of virtual EEPROM writing. Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09 Preparation for flash memory updating. Execution of flash memory updating.
ST
Fig. 18
21
5-4 Camera Section Adjustment

Notes)
(1) Each adjustment data (5-4-1 to 5-4-5) becomes effective after it is written into the DATA as mentioned in 5-4-6. If power must be turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the DATA write procedure as mentioned in 5-4-6. (2) The adjustments from 5-4-2 through 5-4-5 must be carried out in series.
Preparation)
(1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition. (2) Adjustment condition (initial condition) Tape/Card : Tape Program AE AF Image stabilizer Chart : Auto Mode : OFF : OFF : Standard angle of view
5-4-1 Iris Adjustment

CHART SPEC. Automatic adjustment.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR IRIS CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3000 00 2) Perform storing. WR (press the PAUSE button.) RD Microcomputer operation ST Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05 (ST :09 NG)
05
5-4-2 WB Adjustment (1)

CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR WB (1) CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3002 00 2) Perform storing. WR (press the PAUSE button.) RD Microcomputer operation ST Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05 (ST :09 NG)
05
Note) In this adjustment, color balance gain data is set to FF. Be sure to carry out color balance adjustment described in 5-4-3.
22
5-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment

CHART M.EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Lightbox (5600K), and color bar chart Vectorscope VIDEO OUT R : 2.0 (ratio to burst) 90, Ye : 1.0 (ratio to burst) 180
Procedure)
(1) For manual adjustment of color balance, change data at the following four addresses while observing a vectorscope.
ST EP PROCEDURE CB (MANUAL) R GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust relevant data. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) Ye GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) Ye PHASE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) R PHASE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR Microcomputer operation CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 3007 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress. RD ADJ Adjustment is completed. ST RD ST RD ST RD 3008 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress. ADJ Adjustment is completed. 3009 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress. ADJ Adjustment is completed. 300A "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress. ADJ Adjustment is completed.

CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K), and CCA12 filter Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR WB (2) CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3004 00 2) Perform storing. WR (press the PAUSE button.) RD Microcomputer operation ST Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05 (ST :09 NG)
05
23

CHART SPEC. Light box (5600K) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
MONIT OR ST EP PROCEDURE WB (3) CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3005 00 2) Perform storing. WR (press the PAUSE button.) RD Microcomputer operation ST Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with ST :05 (ST :09 NG)
05
5-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (5-4-1 to 5-4-5) into the virtual EEPROM and flash memory.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR EEPROM & FLASH WRIT ING CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3006 00 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) 2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0081 -2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Microcomputer operation ST 05 Completion of virtual EEPROM writing. Completion with ST :05, ST :09 NG Preparation for flash memory updating. Execution of flash memory updating.
24
5-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation

Notes)
(1) Before starting this adjustment, turn power on for 30 minutes. (2) In this adjustment, NG is indicated if there are twelve or more pixel defects on the entire screen. (In the case of NG, no compensation is made.) (3) The picture element loss correction which is validated by this adjustment is also validated automatically every time power is turned ON.
5-5-1 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation (AUTO) Preparation)

(1) Carry out this correction in the product state. (2) Adjustment Conditions Program AE AF Image stabilizer Digital zoom : AUTO : OFF : OFF : OFF
Procedure)
(1) Perform the CCD void pixel correction (automatic mode) according to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 1-1 CCD void pixel correction 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) Virtual EEPROM writing 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 2 08 ST 300E WR RD 00 05 Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. Completion with DT :00 to 0C, NG with DT :8* Microcomputer operation ST
2 2-1
2 0
08 08
ST RD ST RD
300F 0081
00 05 - Completion of virtual EEPROM writing. Completion with DT :02, NG with DT :03 Preparation for flash memory updating. Execution of flash memory updating.
25
5-6 CVF Adjustment

Notes)
(1) Each adjustment data (5-6-2 to 5-6-7) becomes effective after it is written into the DATA as mentioned in 5-6-8. If power must be turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the DATA write procedure as mentioned in 5-6-8. (2) The adjustments from 5-6-2 through 5-6-7 must be carried out in series.
Preparation)
(1) Carry out CVF adjustment in the product condition. (2) For copying black and white master, the service manual CD-ROM and SD card are required. After formatting the SD card, copy the data to an SD card from the appendix of the service manual CD-ROM. Destination folder of saving : DCIM/101CANON, File name: IMG0001.jpg (3) Adjustment condition (initial condition) Tape/Card : Card
5-6-1 Forced CVF ON Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, make the setting.
ST EP Forced CVF ON PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS 1 Function 10 MD ST RD ADDR 0017 DT 10 Adjustment points and range Start of setting Completion of setting
5-6-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment

M. EQ. TP. SPEC. Frequency counter Extension connector - pin 2 (EVF HD) 15.625 0.1kHz
Preparation)
(1) Carry out adjustment according to the table shown below.
ST EP CVF Frequency Adjustment PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS 4 Function 11 MD ST RD ADDR DT Adjustment points and range
0002 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting
26
5-6-3 Contrast Adjustment

MODE M. EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Card playback of monochrome master (still picture) Oscilloscope Extension connector - pin 23 (G), pin 21 (R), pin 24 (B), / VIDEO OUT 2.20 0.05 [V]
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, carry out adjustment in the card playback mode of the monochrome master.
2.20V 0.05V
Fig. 19
ST EP Contrast Adjustment (G)
PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)
MONIT OR CS 4 4 4 Function 11 11 11 MD ST RD ST RD ST RD ADDR DT
Microcomputer operation
0003 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting 0004 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting 0005 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting
Contrast Adjustment (R)
Contrast Adjustment (B)
27
5-6-4 Brightness Adjustment

MODE M. EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Card playback of monochrome master (still picture) Oscilloscope Extension connector - pin 23 (G), pin 21 (R), pin 24 (B), / VIDEO OUT 2.60 0.05 [V]
Procedure)
2.60V 0.05V
Fig. 20
ST EP
PROCEDURE
MONIT OR CS 4 4 4 Function 11 11 11 MD ST RD ST RD ST RD ADDR DT
Brightness Adjustment (G) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) Brightness Adjustment (R) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) Brightness Adjustment (B) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)
0006 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting 0007 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting 0008 "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting
28
5-6-5 Black Limiter Level Adjustment

MODE M. EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Card playback of monochrome master (still picture) Oscilloscope Extension connector - pin 23 (EVF G) / VIDEO OUT 4.45 0.05 [V]
Procedure)
4.45V 0.05V
Fig. 21
MONIT OR CS 4 4 4 4 Function 11 11 11 11 MD RD ST RD ST RD ST RD ADDR 0006 0009 DT 00 "ADJ" ADJ Start of setting Completion of setting
ST EP Black Limiter Level Adjustment
PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 3) Make the setting shown at right. 4) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) 5) Make the setting shown at right. 6) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)
0006 Original value Record the original value. Setting of 00
0006 Original value Reset to the recorded original value.
29
5-6-6 COM Amplitude Adjustment

MODE M. EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Card playback of monochrome master (still picture) Oscilloscope Extension connector - pin 22 (EVF COM) / VIDEO OUT 3.50 0.05 [V]
Procedure)
3.50V 0.05V
Fig. 22
MONIT OR CS 4 Function 11 MD ST RD ADDR DT
ST EP COM Amplitude Adjustment
PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.)
000B "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting
30
5-6-7 COM-DC Level Adjustment

MODE M. EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. Card playback of monochrome master (still picture) Oscilloscope Extension connector - pin 22 (EVF COM) / VIDEO OUT 3.20 0.05 [V] (DC. P-P center of EVF COM to GND level)
Procedure)
3.20V 0.05V
Fig. 23
ST EP COM-DC Level Ajustment PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS 4 Function 11 MD ST RD ADDR DT Microcomputer operation
000A "ADJ" Start of setting ADJ Completion of setting
31
5-6-8 Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Automatic Writing
Procedure)
(1) Write adjustment data (5-6-2 to 7) into the flash memory according the table shown below.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, Flash Memory writing.
ST EP 1 PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS 4 Function 09 MD ST RD ADDR 0081 DT 00 Microcomputer operation Flash Memory Writing
5-6-9 Release of Forced CVF ON Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, make the setting.
ST EP Release of Forced CVF ON PROCEDURE 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS 1 Function 10 MD ST RD ADDR 0017 DT 00 Microcomputer operation Start of setting Completion of setting
32
5-7 Color Balance Check

Preparation)
(1) Carry out this correction in the product state. (2) Adjustment Conditions Program AE AF Image stabilizer Digital zoom CHART M.EQ. TP/TRIG. SPEC. : AUTO : OFF : OFF : OFF
Lightbox (5600K), and color bar chart Vectorscope VIDEO OUT R : 1.75 98 ( 0.15, 5), Ye : 0.9 175 ( 0.15, 5)
Procedure)
(1) Quit the service mode, and turn power OFF/ON. (2) Perform light-box recording, and carry out WB SET using the relevant function of the product. (3) Take an image of the color bar chart, and check that the levels of R, Ye and G are within the specified ranges respectively. (4) If the result of the above check is NG, carry out camera section adjustment again.
33
5-8 Recorder Section Adjustment

Note)
(1) Each of the adjustment data (5-8-1 to 5-8-3) becomes valid when 5-8-5 flash memory writing is made. When turning power OFF/ ON during each adjustment, be sure to carry out 5-8-5 flash memory writing.
Preparation)
(1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state.
5-8-0 LCD PCB Setting Destination

When mounting the LCD P.C.B of service part, perform the following adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Add "09" to the current value, and store the result data. MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 4 10 ST 0003 - RD ADJ Microcomputer operation
5-8-1 SWP Adjustment

MODE SPEC. Playback of color bar master (DY9-1381-000) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE SWP (AUT O) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 08 ST 0001 -WR RD Microcomputer operation
Automatic adjustment is in progress. Automatic adjustment is completed.
5-8-2 C. FG Adjustment
MODE SPEC. Playback of color bar master (DY9-1381-000) Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE C.FG(AUT O) 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 08 ST 0003 -WR RD Microcomputer operation
34
5-8-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG

MODE Stop without VTR cassette
Procedure)
(1) Carry out reel FG adjustment according to the following table.
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 08 ST 0007 -WR RD Microcomputer operation
5-8-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment

MODE SPEC. During camera recording in product condition (AF : OFF, LCD PANEL : ON) Power supply voltage: 5.85 0.02 [V]
Note)
(1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start. (2) In step 1 - 2), after completion of storing, "ST" remains indicated or "WR" is indicated momentarily and then "ST" is indicated again without returning to "RD". Be sure to check in step 2 that the adjustment has been completed.
Procedure)
(1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.85 0.02[V]. (2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR BAT T ERY VOLT AGE DROP. CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 1 08 ST 0001 -2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) 2 Check if the value of DT is updated on DT 2 during ST ORE. Microcomputer operation
Adjustment is completed.
5-8-5 Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Memory data writing
Procedure)
(1) Write adjustment data (5-8-1 to 4) into the flash memory according the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE 1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) MONIT OR CS Function MD ADDR DT 0 08 ST 0081 -RD Microcomputer operation Preparation for flash memory updating. Execution of flash memory updating.
35
5-9 Tape Path Adjustment

Note)
(1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC III Section.
Preparation)
(1) For tape path adjustment, make the recorder adjustment setting (P. 2, 3).
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table given below (STEPS 1, 2, 3), play back the tracking master (DY9-1345-000) for tape path adjustment. At STEP 2, perform tracking shift by adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF so that the RF envelope will be 70%. (2) After adjustment, restore tracking shift setting to normal according to the following table (STEPS 4 : P.OFF).
MONIT OR ST EP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation T RACKING T APE CS Function MD ADDR DT 1 1) Play back the tracking tape. 2 1) Set up tracking shift. 2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 00 ST 9FE7 F2 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) 3) Perform 70% tracking shift by ST F0~FF T he amount of tracking shift is changed. adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF. 4) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) * T racking shift released in DT 00. 3 1) Perform tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state. 4 1) Select the normal mode. 2) T urn off power to the main unit.
36
Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach the transparent chart on a vectorscope display.
Color balance adjustment chart

PAL MVX250i E, MVX200 E, MV200i E
R-Y R
BURST
B-Y Ye
Color balance check chart

PAL MVX250i E, MVX200 E, MV200i E
R-Y
BURST
Ye
B-Y
37
SERVICE HINTS
CONTENTS
1. Service Hints -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1-2 Location of Main Elements ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 1-3 Current Consumption Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 2. Trouble Shooting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 2-1 Power Supply ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 2-2 Camera Picture Faulty ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 2-3 Faulty of Playback Picture -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 2-4 Startup Window Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 2-5 Short cut demonstration mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E SERVICE HINTS
1. Service Hints
1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards
The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.
OPERATION KEY
CVF P.C.B. CCD P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B. R-KEY P.C.B. JACK1 P.C.B.
CAV P.C.B.
JACK2 P.C.B.
LCD P.C.B.
Fig. 1
1-2 Location of Main Elements
MAIN P.C.B.
IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL FU1810 IC102 BACKUP IC100 MODE MI-COM
FU3205 FU3203
FU3202 FU3201
IC301 MOTOR DRIVE
IC300 OPE AMP
IC1810 CHARGE IC
IC1811 OPE AMP
IC3203 4.7V REGULATOR
IC2300 FLASH
IC1101 SDRAM IC2302 SDRAM
IC1102 SDRAM
IC1103 DIGIC DV
IC2301 VIC4
IC2000 VRP2
Fig. 2
CAV P.C.B.
IC1004 2.8V REGULATOR IC1001 INVERTER
IC1002 TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER
IC801 AUDIO INTERFACE
IC1501 EVF DRIVER
IC1200 LENS DRIVE
LCD P.C.B.
IC4201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL
IC901 EEPROM
IC902 LCD DRIVE
JACK1 P.C.B.
CCD P.C.B.
IC1070 CCD IC1602 SENSOR GYRO
IC1601 SENSOR GYRO
Fig. 3
1-3 Current Consumption Check

The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status. Measurement condition Preset voltage : Product status, camera auto mode(AF OFF), LCD ON (Approx. 0.1A each smaller in case of CVF) : 7.4V
POWER SW CAMERA MODE REC PAUSE REC VCR STOP PLAY POWER OFF Current consumption (A) 0.43 0.47 0.29 0.37 0.6 (mA)
2. Trouble Shooting
To detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.
2-1 Power Supply

<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences. Main power is connected. UNREG is supplied to the MAIN P.C.B. MODE MI-COM starts up. MODE MI-COM outputs VCR ON H signal. PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. Establishes communication with the FR MI-COM. FR MI-COM initializes recorder mechanical chassis. After initialized, the MODE MI-COM is brought into the standby status with the VCR ON changed to VCR Low. After that, the power supply is turned ON by the following procedures. Power supply mode switch operation After MODE MI-COM is accepted, VCR ON H is output. The PWM driver is started to turn on various power supplies. The FR MI-COM is started to control the system.
<Check Points>
1) 2) Key Inputs Check the key inputs at Powe r Switch in the SERVICE mode. Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indicated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty. 3) Error in Mechanism (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P. 9) If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected. At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters ERROR STOP state. In this case, check the error data in the SERVICE mode. 4) 5) VCR O N H, CAM ON H (control signal from MODE MI-COM) Outputs Check the output of control signal. Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B. Check the continuity of the fuses FU3201, 3202, 3203, 3205 and 1801 on the MAIN P.C.B. In case of NG, replace the fuse and check the power consumption. Replace the MAIN P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation.
6)
2-2 Camera Picture Faulty

<Hints>
A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below. CCD CAV P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. (DIGIC DV VIC4) JACK1 / JACK2 P.C.B.
<Check Points>
1) 2) 3) Check of lens reset (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P.11) If no camera picture appears, check if the lens has been reset by means of the service mode. In case of NG, check the lens. Check of blue back output If the blue back is confirmed, the signal line subsequent to VIC4 is considered to be OK. Check of DIGIC DV generation signal (white 100% or color bar) (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P.10) The white 100% or color bar signals are generated by the DIGIC DV on the MAIN P.C.B. In the service mode, if the output of the white 100% or color bar signal is attained, the signal line subsequent to DIGIC DV is considered to be OK. Check of CCD output The CCD output is sampled by IC1002 (TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER). Check the signal. Check by command particular to camera (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P.10) Check the operation of White balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the service mode.
4) 5)
2-3 Faulty of Playback Picture

<Hints>
In the DV, degradation of picture quality normally appears on the screen as block noise. This is because, if an error occurs exceeding the ability of the error correction circuit, the block by block information of pictures is not played back properly and thus complemented by the previous picture information. Normally, such block noise appears on the screen when the error rate has considerably been degraded due to the degraded tape or the lowered head output, etc. Be sure to check the playback picture quality by the error rate.
<Check Points>
1) 2) Deterioration of Tape Quality Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit. Error Rate (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P. 8) In the service mode, check an error rate of self-recording/LP playback. The specified allowable error rate is 2 10-5. In case of NG, take the following procedure. (1) Observe a playback envelope. If it is abnormal, carry out tape-path adjustment. (2) Run a cleaning tape. Use the cleaning tape of hard type (DY9-1384-000).
[Playback time]
After replacement of the drum unit 25 seconds For cleaning 25 seconds per time * Do not proceed to a playback for 25 seconds or more continuously. * Limit the total of playback time to five minutes. * When using hard-type cleaning tape, select the cleaning mode on the product main unit. (Refer to SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT [4-3 - Cleaning Mode] P.10) (3) Check the error rate again. If the error rate is out of the specified range, clean the tape drive parts (posts, drum) using cleaning paper moistened with alcohol. * Take care not to damage the head. * Do not touch the head with bare hand. (4) Check the error rate again. If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the tape with a new one and check the error rate again. At this step, use a tape (must be Panasonic LP tape) which has been purchased at a different time. The error rate may become worse due to inconsistent quality or aging of the tape. (5) Check the error rate again. If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the drum unit. (6) Check the error rate again. If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the mechanical unit.
2-4 Startup Window Setting

When users original data are written over the initial default data of the start-up image or the sound, shutter, operation or self-timer [User Setting] , the users original data become a default data (replace the initial default data) after replacement of the MAIN P.C.B. Note that the data thus written by the user is recognized as a non-original data. To avoid this, follow the next procedure.
Procedure)
How to save an original data to a PC and write it to the main unit: (1) In the MyCamera window on the Zoom Browser EX, save original image data to a PC. (2) Replace the MAIN P.C.B. (3) In the MyCamera window, set the original image data saved at step (1) to the camera. For details, refer to the DIGITAL VIDEO SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL - Customizing Your Camcorder with the MyCamera Settings.
Note)
Only where the USB I/F is available for connection between the PC and main unit, it is allowed to save/write original data using the Zoom Browser EX.
2-5 Short cut demonstration mode

As a function destined to shop salesman, the Image stabilizer and white LED can easily be turned ON/OFF. Also, the screen indicates the version of firmware.
<Operation procedure>
1. Start the operation in the camera mode or card camera mode, and take out the cassette and memory card. 2. Set the Program selector to P . 3. While holding down the Select/Set button, press the MENU button for at least two seconds with the P.AE mode selection screen (Fig. 4) displayed. Release the MENU button only.
P.AE mode selection screen Fig. 4
4. Releasing the MENU button displays the short cut demonstration screen (Fig. 5).
Short cut demonstration screen Fig. 5
5. Operate the Selector dial to change different settings. Note : The magenta indication items cannot be selected. ex) IS setting in card camera mode. 6. Press the MENU button or select CLOSE on the screen to exit.
PARTS LIST
CONTENTS
EXPLODED VIEWS Casing Parts Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 Front Cover Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 Left Cover Unit Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 Right Cover Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 LCD Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 Rear Cover Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 Recorder Unit Section-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 Recorder Unit Section-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 CVF Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 Camera Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 20 Lens Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 Mechanical Chassis Section-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 Mechanical Chassis Section-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 Mechanical Chassis Section-3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28 Mechanical Chassis Section-4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30 Accessory Section-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32 Accessory Section-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34 FUSE Replacement Instruction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36 ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 PARTS LIST --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38
CAUTION
1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks. in this electrical parts list. Critical parts are marked with 2. For continued protection against risk of fire, replace FU3201, FU3202, FU3205 only with same TYPE : 0435001 1.0-24V FUSE Replace FU3203, FU1810 only with same TYPE : 043501.5 1.5-24V FUSE Manufacturer : Littel FUSE
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E PARTS LIST
Casing Parts Section

14 2 3 5 4 63 12
Left Cover Unit Rear Cover Unit

10 9
Camera/Lens/CVF/ Recorder Unit

63 6 92 9 7 113 11 13 12 14 15 11
11
Front Cover Unit

8
Rigt Cover/LCD Unit
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PART NO.
XA1-3170-507 DA2-0436-000 DA3-1447-000 DA3-1548-000 DF1-5078-000 XA1-7170-507 XA1-7170-357 D52-0260-000 XA1-7170-557 XA1-7170-257 XA1-7170-207 XA1-7170-307 XA4-9170-407 XA4-9170-607 XA4-9170-507 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F C C C B F F B F F F F F F F B
QTY
4 1 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 4 1 6 2 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW SHOE, ACCESSARY COVER, ACC SHOE COVER, ACC SHOE COVER ASSY, TOP SCREW SCREW CAP, LENS SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW HOLDER, LI BATT
REMARKS
MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW NEW
NEW
DA3-1439-000 000
NEW
Front Cover Unit Section

10 9 13 11 21
8 5 12
14
*1
113 113 15
6 4
7 17 18 19
16
20
2 1
*1 : MVX250i E ONLY
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
PART NO.
DA3-1526-000 DA3-1532-000 DY1-8651-000 DA3-1470-000 DA3-1531-000 DY1-8658-000 DY1-8660-000 DY1-8650-000 DY1-8673-000 DA3-1469-000 DA3-1456-000 DA3-1588-000 DG3-0401-000 DG3-0418-000 XA4-9170-407 XA4-9170-507 DA3-1465-000 DA3-1568-000 XA1-7170-357 DA3-1460-000 DA3-1462-000 DF1-5058-000 DA3-1461-000 DA3-1463-000 DY1-8682-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
B B B B B B B B B B C C C C F F C C F C C C C C B B C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
COVER, JACK2 COVER, JACK2 C COVER ASSY, JACK2 PANEL, FRONT PANEL, FRONT RING ASSY, LENS RING ASSY, LENS COVER ASSY, JACK1 COVER ASSY, JACK1 PLATE, MEGA PIXEL
REMARKS
MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW NEW MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW MVX250i MVX200i MVX250i MVX200i E E, MVX200 E E E, MVX200 E NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
RUBBER, LENS CUSHION, LED W LAY CUT MVX250i E PCB ASSY, JACK1 MVX250i E PCB ASSY, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E SCREW SCREW CHARGE LED CUSHION, LED LAY CUT SCREW PLATE, MIC RUBBER, MIC MIC ASSY SHIELD, MIC SHEET, MIC COVER ASSY, FRONT COVER ASSY, FRONT CUSHION, FRONT
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
MVX250i E
DY1-8683-000 000 DA3-1602-000 000
MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW NEW
Left Cover Unit Section

9 12 2 11 12 10 12
13 3 4 5 20 7 8 19 15 25 234 24 14 16 6 17 18
21 22 23
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
PART NO.
XA1-7170-307 DA3-1472-000 WR1-5090-000 DA3-1489-000 DH2-5206-000 DA3-1485-000 DA3-1593-000 DA3-1484-000 DA3-1486-000 DA3-1488-000 DA3-1592-000 DG3-0408-000 DG3-0432-000 DA3-1471-000 DA3-1601-000 DA3-1483-000 DA3-1482-000 DA3-1481-000 DA3-1477-000 DA3-1603-000 XA1-7170-357 DF1-5064-000 DA3-1574-000 XA4-9170-459 DA3-1487-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F B C C C B C C B B C B B B C C C C C C F C C F C C C C
QTY
6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW COVER, CASSETE SPEAKER CUSHION, SPEAKER FPC, SPEAKER COVER, REGULATION TAPE, GND HOOK, F GRIP COVER, ZOOM TOP TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER2 ZOOM PHOTO ASSY ZOOM PHOTO ASSY COVER, LEFT TAPE,LB GND LOCK, GRIP PIN KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN SPRING, CASSETTE HOOK SPRING, CASSETTE CLICK CUSHION, L COVER SCREW ARM ASSY, CASSETTE SHIELD, LEFT COVER SCREW SHEET, CASSETTE ARM LABEL, CAUTION LABEL, CAUTION LABEL, CAUTION
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW MVX250i E MVX200i E MVX200 E NEW NEW NEW
DA3-1595-000 000 DA3-1597-000 000 DA3-1596-000 000
Right Cover Unit Section

4
3 12 2
A
6 8 9
10
11 7
A
LCD UNIT
1 14 12
13
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PART NO.
XA4-9170-507 DA3-1437-000 DA3-1611-000 XA4-9170-407 DA3-1440-000 DG3-0403-000 DA3-1443-000 DA3-1445-000 DY1-8656-000 DY1-8657-000 DY1-8681-000 DA3-1435-000 DA3-1438-000 DA3-1571-000 DA3-1442-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F C C F C C C C B B B C C B C B C
QTY
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW COVER, HINGE LABEL, HOLD SCREW CASE, LITHIUM PCB ASSY, KEY BASE, TRIPOD HOOK, CARD COVER COVER ASSY, RIGHT COVER ASSY, RIGHT
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
MVX250i E MVX200i E
10 11 12 13 14
COVER ASSY, RIGHT MVX200 E NEW GUIDE, ACCESS LED LIGHT NEW SHEET, BLINDFOLD MVX250i E NEW SHEET, BLINDFOLD BLUE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW SHAFT, CARD COVER NEW COVER, CARD RUBBER, INSULATION NEW NEW
DA3-1436-000 000 DA3-1610-000 000
LCD Unit Section

15 16 17 18 14 12 8 13 54 4 9 3 12 2 10 11 6
10
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2
PART NO.
XA1-7170-407 DA3-1508-000 DA3-1552-000 DA3-1534-000 DG3-0400-000 DA3-1503-000 DA3-1607-000 DG3-0404-000 DY1-8670-000 WG2-5272-000 DA3-1502-000 DA3-1510-000 DA3-1569-000 DA3-1506-000 DA2-0909-000 DA3-1504-000 DA3-1544-000 DA2-1737-000 DG3-0406-000 DH2-5205-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F B B B C C C C B B B B C B C B B C C B F C
QTY
2 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW COVER, LCD COVER, LCD COVER, LCD PCB ASSY, TOP TOP TOP LCD
REMARKS
MVX250i E MVX200i E MVX200 E NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW NEW NEW MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
*1 *2
HOLDER, LCD SHEET, LCD2 BACK LIGHT ASSY, LCD LCD ASSY(SELECTION) LCD ASSY COVER, LCD BOTTOM COVER, LCD BOTTOM SPRING, LCD LOCK KNOB, LCD OPEN SHAFT, LCD LOCK COVER, LCD HINGE TOP COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MAGNET, HINJI HINGE, LCD FPC, LCD-KEY
DA3-1505-000 000 XA4-9170-907 000 DG3-0419-000 000
COVER, LCD HINGE BOTTOM SCREW FPC, LCD DETECT
*1 : Free from the pixel dot. *2 : Same quality as the production line.
11
Rear Cover Unit Section

11 3 1 12
8 7 6 5 32 3
10
4 133 2 14
12
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
PART NO.
DA3-1500-000 XA4-9170-357 XA4-9170-457 DA3-1490-000 DA3-1499-000 XA4-9170-557 DG3-0409-000 DA3-1497-000 DA3-1498-000 DA3-1492-000 DA3-1495-000 DA3-1491-000 XA4-9170-407 DF1-5059-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C F F C C F B C C C C B F C
QTY
1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
DESCRIPTION
BELT, GRIP SCREW SCREW PLATE, GRIP BELT SHAFT, GRIP BELT SCREW SWITCH ASSY,POWER HOLDER, EJECT SPRING, EJECT KNOB, BATTERY EJECT PLATE, STRAP COVER, REAR SCREW TERMINAL ASSY, BATTERY
REMARKS
NEW
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
13
Recorder Unit Section-1

2 4 3 4
*1 CVF Unit
*1
Camera/Lens/ Recorder Unit

7 6 5
A
*1 : MVX250i E ONLY
7
14
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PART NO.
DH2-5175-000 DG3-0410-000 XA1-7170-357 XA1-7170-257 DA3-1604-000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C F F C C F
QTY
1 1 1 3 1 1 2
DESCRIPTION
FPC, ACS-MAIN CONNECTOR ASSY, SHOE SCREW SCREW CUSHION, RC1 CUSHION, RC2 SCREW
REMARKS
MVX250i E MVX250i E NEW NEW
NEW NEW
DA3-1605-000 000 XA1-7170-207 000
15
Recorder Unit Section-2

A
Camera/Lens Unit
10 24 1 42 52 6 5 4 11 23 22
A
14 13
12
21
20
3 22 93 8 73 15 16 23 17 18 19
16
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
<Caution> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PART NO.
DY1-8609-000 XA1-7170-257 DG3-0402-000 DA3-1026-000 DA3-1429-000 DF1-5075-000 XA9-1167-000 DA2-0314-000 DA3-0941-000 DA3-1426-000 DA3-1591-000 DA3-0161-000 DA3-1428-000 DA3-1609-000 DH2-5174-000 DH2-5173-000 WE8-6147-000 DH2-5204-000 DH2-5209-000 DG3-0398-000 DH2-5172-000 DA3-1427-000 DY1-8645-000 DY1-8648-000 DY1-8649-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C F C F C C F C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C F
QTY
1 5 1 3 3 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
RECORDER UNIT, DMCIII SCREW PCB ASSY, JACK2 SCREW RUBBER, HOLDER HOLDER, SCREW SPRING, RUBBER, HOLDER, RECORDER PLATE INSULATION SUB
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
RUBBER, SHIELDING FOAM SHIELD CASE, HA SHIELD CASE, PM2 CUSHION, CCD CORE FPC, MAIN-JACK2 FPC, MAIN-JACK1 CORE, FERRITE FPC, CAV-JACK1 CABLE, MAIN-JACK1 PCB ASSY, CAV FPC, MAIN-KEY SHIELD CASE, PM1 PCB ASSY, MAIN PCB ASSY, MAIN PCB ASSY, MAIN SCREW
MVX250i E MVX200i E MVX200 E
24
XA1-7170-207 000
<Caution> : When using this part on the product, replace the Housing Cover with the DA3-2345-000 (Symbol No.10, page 25).
17
CVF Unit Section

16 15 14 1 32 2 12 11 10 9 8 7 18 19 4 17 13
6 20 21 22
23 32 24
18
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
PART NO.
DA3-1517-000 DA3-1511-000 XA1-7170-257 DG3-0407-000 DA3-1518-000 DH2-5203-000 DG3-0405-000 DA3-1521-000 DA3-1523-000 DA3-1522-000 WG2-5241-000 DA3-2318-000 DY1-8678-000 YN1-3090-000 DA3-1516-000 YN1-3093-000 DA3-1076-000 DA3-1520-000 XA9-1166-000 DY1-8703-000 DA3-1071-000 XA4-9170-407 DA3-1512-000 DA3-1524-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
B B F C C C C C C C C C B C C C C C F B C F B C
QTY
1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
COVER, DUST COVER, CVF TOP SCREW HINGE ASSY, CVF PLATE, CVF CLICK FPC, CVF-CAV PCB ASSY, CVF REFLECTOR, CVF DIFFUSER, CVF CUSHION, CVF PANEL LCD ASSY, CVF MASK, CVF COVER ASSY, CVF INNER TOP LENS, EYEPIECE 1 HOLDER, CVF LENS LENS, EYEPIECE 2 RUBBER, CVF KNOB KNOB, CVF SCREW COVER ASSY, CVF INNER BOTTOM SPRING, CVF CLICK SCREW COVER, CVF BOTTOM HOLDER, FPC
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
NEW NEW
19
Camera Unit Section

62 4 7 2 1 5
LENS UNIT
20
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PART NO.
DH9-3009-000 DA3-1424-000 DY1-8671-000 DH2-5176-000 DG3-0399-000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
B C C C C F C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 2 1
DESCRIPTION
FILTER, IR RUBBER, INSULATION CCD ASSY FPC, CCD-CAV PCB ASSY, CCD SCREW CORE, FERRITE
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
XA4-9170-507 000 WE8-6201-000 000
21
Lens Unit Section

1
3 22 3
42
22
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5
PART NO.
DG3-0715-000 XA4-9170-457 XA4-9170-357 XA4-5170-457 YH8-2015-000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C F F F C
QTY
1 3 2 2 1
DESCRIPTION
LENS ASSY SCREW SCREW SCREW IG METER ASSY
REMARKS
NEW NEW
NEW
23
DMC III PARTS LIST
Mechanical Chassis Section-1

1 3 9
(10)
33
5 7 8
24
DMC III PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
<Caution> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PART NO.
DG1-4506-000 XA1-7140-147 DA2-2138-000 DY1-8500-000 DA2-2139-000 DF1-1703-000 DA2-2116-000 DA2-2115-000 DY1-8501-000 DA3-2345-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
B C C E C C C C B C
QTY
1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
COMPARTMENT ASSY, CASSETTE SCREW SCREW DRUM ASSY WASHER IDLER ASSY SPRING, COIL (DRUM) SCREW CHASSIS ASSY, SLIDE COVER, HOUSING
REMARKS
NEW
NEW
<Caution> : When using this part on the product, replace the Housing Cover with the DA3-2345-000 (Symbol No.10).
25
DMC III PARTS LIST

1 3 4 9 5 6 11 10 2 1
7 8 12 6 13
26
DMC III PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
PART NO.
DA2-0645-000 DG1-4504-000 DS1-0193-000 DF1-1693-000 DF1-1694-000 DA2-2139-000 DF1-1704-000 DS1-0199-000 DG1-4505-000 DA2-2220-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C C C C C C C C
QTY
2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
WASHER REEL ASSY, S SPRING, COIL (TENSION) BRAKE ASSY, TENSION RELEASE ASSY, TENSION WASHER BRAKE ASSY, S SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE) REEL ASSY, T LEVER, EJECT BRAKE, MAIN T SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE) REVIEW ARM ASSY
REMARKS
DA2-2238-000 000 DS1-0198-000 000 DF1-1695-000 000
27
DMC III PARTS LIST

1 22 (5) (4) (6) 23 9 (14) (7) 22 3 8
11 12
13
2 10
28
DMC III PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
PART NO.
DG1-4502-000 DA2-2261-000 DG1-4497-010 DF1-1687-000 DF1-1688-000 DA2-0780-000 DF1-1686-000 DA2-2259-000 DG1-4503-000 XA1-7140-147 DG1-4500-000 DA2-2139-000 DS1-0192-000 DA2-2128-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
QTY
1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
MOTOR ASSY, LOADING SCREW GUIDE RAIL ASSY ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE S ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE T SCREW DRUM BASE ASSY SCREW MOTOR ASSY, CAPSTAN SCREW ROLLER ASSY, PINCH WASHER SPRING, COIL (PINCH) S LOADING GEAR
REMARKS
29
DMC III PARTS LIST

1 3
8 4 9 5 2 6
11
10
30
DMC III PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PART NO.
DA2-2191-000 XA1-7140-147 DA2-2196-000 DA2-2197-000 DA2-2190-000 DA2-2140-000 DA2-2188-000 DA2-2139-000 DA2-2195-000 DG1-4501-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C C C C C C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
LEVER, CAM SCREW BELT, TIMING GEAR, PULLEY GEAR, CONNECT WASHER GEAR, WHEEL WASHER GEAR, CAPSTAN CHASSIS ASSY, MAIN GUIDE, TENSION CAM
REMARKS
DA2-2192-000 000
31
Accessory Section-1
CA-570 N.S. (Product available) CB-2LT 1 N.S. (Product available)
CBC-NB2
N.S. (Product available)
JPN A E N.S. (Commercially available.Make copy sample pictures if necessary.) SDC-8M PLUG TYPE B AS
N.S. (Product available) NB-2L/NB-2LH/ BP-2L12/BP-2L14 WL-D83(E,P)
(6)
(5)
32
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4
PART NO.
DY1-8531-000 D82-0643-000 D82-0645-000 CD1-4054-010 D83-0682-000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C B B C C C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
DC CABLE CORD, AC(E) CORD, AC(AS) COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E)
REMARKS
PLUG TYPE E PLUG TYPE AS MVX250i E, NEW NEW NEW
5 6
D83-0683-000 000 DY1-8528-000 000 DY1-8530-000 000 DY1-8674-000 000
MVX200i E WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(PAL) MVX200 E COVER, BATTERY LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(E) MVX250i E, MVX200i E LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(PAL) MVX200 E
NEW
33
Accessory Section-2
N.S. (Product available) FS-34U WIDE ATTACHMENT WA-34 1
MVX250i ONLY
N.S. (Product available) WD-H34 3
N.S. (Product available) TL-H34 3
IFC-300PCU N.S. (Product available)
SS-900
34
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
1 2 3 4 5
PART NO.
D55-0240-000 DA3-2340-000 DA3-2338-000 DA3-2337-000 D81-1470-000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
B B B B B
QTY
1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
WIDE ATTACHMENT CAP, FRONT CAP, REAR CAP, FRONT STRAP, SHOULDER
REMARKS
MVX250i E NEW NEW NEW NEW
SS900
35
FUSE Replacement Instruction

CAUTION - FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE FU3201, FU3202, FU3205 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE: 0435001 1.0-24V FUSE REPLACE FU3203, FU1810 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE: 043501.5 1.5-24V FUSE MANUFACTURER: LITTELFUSE
MAIN P.C.B.
FU1810
IC3201
IC100 IC102
IC301 IC300
FU3205
IC103
FU3202 FU3201
FU3203
36
ELECTRICAL PARTS
SYMBOL
MAIN P.C.B CN2102 FU1810 FU3201 FU3202 FU3203 FU3205
PART NO.
VS1-7098-021 VD7-2871-501 VD7-2871-001 VD7-2871-001 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
CONNECTOR 21P CHIP FUSE CHIP FUSE CHIP FUSE CHIP FUSE CHIP FUSE
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
VD7-2871-501 000 VD7-2871-001 000
JACK1 P.C.B. CN41 WS1-5716-000 000 CN81 CN3212 CN3551 JACK2 P.C.B. CN11 CN31 CN91 LCD P.C.B. CN901 VS1-6596-027 000 WS1-6347-000 000 WS1-6263-000 000 VS1-7098-021 000 WS1-5524-000 000 WS1-6113-000 000 WS1-6247-000 000
C C C C
1 1 1 1
JACK, MIC JACK, MINI AV JACK, DC JACK, USB
MVX250i E
NEW
C C C
1 1 1
JACK, DV JACK, S-VIDEO CONNECTOR 21P
NEW NEW
CONNECTOR 27P
37
PARTS LIST
PAGE
33 3 35 35 33 33 33 33 17 3 27 29 11 11 25 25 29 25 25,27,29,31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 27 27 29 29 17 17 17 19 19 21 17 17 17 17 9 9 9 9 3 9 9 9 9 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
PART NO.
CD1-4054-010 D52-0260-000 D55-0240-000 D81-1470-000 D82-0643-000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C B B B C C B B C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C F C C C C C C C C B C C B C C C C C C C C C C C B
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW PLUG TYPE E
COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L CAP, LENS WIDE ATTACHMENT MVX250i E STRAP, SHOULDER SS900 CORD, AC(E)
D82-0645-000 000 D83-0682-000 000 D83-0683-000 000 DA2-0314-000 DA2-0436-000 DA2-0645-000 DA2-0780-000 DA2-0909-000 DA2-1737-000 DA2-2115-000 DA2-2116-000 DA2-2128-000 DA2-2138-000 DA2-2139-000 DA2-2140-000 DA2-2188-000 DA2-2190-000 DA2-2191-000 DA2-2192-000 DA2-2195-000 DA2-2196-000 DA2-2197-000 DA2-2220-000 DA2-2238-000 DA2-2259-000 DA2-2261-000 DA3-0161-000 DA3-0941-000 DA3-1026-000 DA3-1071-000 DA3-1076-000 DA3-1424-000 DA3-1426-000 DA3-1427-000 DA3-1428-000 DA3-1429-000 DA3-1435-000 DA3-1436-000 DA3-1437-000 DA3-1438-000 DA3-1439-000 DA3-1440-000 DA3-1442-000 DA3-1443-000 DA3-1445-000 DA3-1447-000 DA3-1456-000 DA3-1460-000 DA3-1461-000 DA3-1462-000 DA3-1463-000 DA3-1465-000 DA3-1469-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CORD, AC(AS) PLUG TYPE AS WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E) MVX250i E, MVX200i E NEW WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(PAL) MVX200 E NEW SPRING, PLATE SHOE, ACCESSARY WASHER SCREW SHAFT, LCD LOCK MAGNET, HINJI SCREW SPRING, COIL (DRUM) S LOADING GEAR SCREW WASHER WASHER GEAR, WHEEL GEAR, CONNECT LEVER, CAM GUIDE, TENSION CAM GEAR, CAPSTAN BELT, TIMING GEAR, PULLEY LEVER, EJECT BRAKE, MAIN T SCREW SCREW SHIELD CASE, HA RUBBER, INSULATION SCREW SPRING, RUBBER, RUBBER, HOLDER, CVF CLICK CVF KNOB INSULATION SUB
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
SHIELD CASE, PM1 SHIELD CASE, PM2 RUBBER, HOLDER GUIDE, ACCESS LED LIGHT COVER, CARD COVER, HINGE SHEET, BLINDFOLD HOLDER, LI BATT CASE, LITHIUM SHAFT, CARD COVER BASE, TRIPOD HOOK, CARD COVER COVER, ACC SHOE RUBBER, LENS PLATE, MIC SHIELD, MIC RUBBER, MIC SHEET, MIC CHARGE LED PLATE, MEGA PIXEL MVX250i E
MVX250i E
38
PARTS LIST
PAGE
5 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 5 5 5 11 11 3 11 5 11 9 7 5 17 7 7 7 7 7 7 5 7 15
PART NO.
DA3-1470-000 DA3-1471-000 DA3-1472-000 DA3-1477-000 DA3-1481-000 DA3-1482-000 DA3-1483-000 DA3-1484-000 DA3-1485-000 DA3-1486-000 DA3-1487-000 DA3-1488-000 DA3-1489-000 DA3-1490-000 DA3-1491-000 DA3-1492-000 DA3-1495-000 DA3-1497-000 DA3-1498-000 DA3-1499-000 DA3-1500-000 DA3-1502-000 DA3-1503-000 DA3-1504-000 DA3-1505-000 DA3-1506-000 DA3-1508-000 DA3-1510-000 DA3-1511-000 DA3-1512-000 DA3-1516-000 DA3-1517-000 DA3-1518-000 DA3-1520-000 DA3-1521-000 DA3-1522-000 DA3-1523-000 DA3-1524-000 DA3-1526-000 DA3-1531-000 DA3-1532-000 DA3-1534-000 DA3-1544-000 DA3-1548-000 DA3-1552-000 DA3-1568-000 DA3-1569-000 DA3-1571-000 DA3-1574-000 DA3-1588-000 DA3-1591-000 DA3-1592-000 DA3-1593-000 DA3-1595-000 DA3-1596-000 DA3-1597-000 DA3-1601-000 DA3-1602-000 DA3-1603-000 DA3-1604-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
B B B C C C C C B B C B C C B C C C C C C B C B B B B B B B C B C C C C C C B B B B B C B C C B C C C C C C C C C C C C
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
PANEL, FRONT MVX250i E COVER, LEFT COVER, CASSETE SPRING, CASSETTE CLICK SPRING, CASSETTE HOOK KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN LOCK, GRIP PIN HOOK, F GRIP COVER, REGULATION COVER, ZOOM TOP SHEET, CASSETTE ARM TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER CUSHION, SPEAKER PLATE, GRIP BELT COVER, REAR KNOB, BATTERY EJECT PLATE, STRAP HOLDER, EJECT SPRING, EJECT SHAFT, GRIP BELT BELT, GRIP COVER, LCD BOTTOM MVX250i E HOLDER, LCD COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MVX250i E COVER, LCD HINGE BOTTOM KNOB, LCD OPEN COVER, LCD TOP COVER, LCD BOTTOM COVER, CVF TOP COVER, CVF BOTTOM HOLDER, CVF LENS COVER, DUST PLATE, CVF CLICK KNOB, CVF REFLECTOR, CVF CUSHION, CVF PANEL DIFFUSER, CVF HOLDER, FPC COVER, JACK2 PANEL, FRONT COVER, COVER, COVER, COVER, COVER, JACK2 C LCD TOP LCD HINGE TOP ACC SHOE LCD TOP
NEW MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW MVX200 E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW MVX200i E NEW
CUSHION, LED LAY CUT NEW SPRING, LCD LOCK NEW SHEET, BLINDFOLD BLUE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW SHIELD, LEFT COVER NEW CUSHION, LED W LAY CUT MVX250i E NEW RUBBER, SHIELDING FOAM TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER2 TAPE, GND LABEL, CAUTION MVX250i E LABEL, CAUTION MVX200 E LABEL, CAUTION TAPE,LB GND CUSHION, FRONT CUSHION, L COVER CUSHION, RC1 MVX200i E NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
39
PARTS LIST
PAGE
15 11 17 9 9 19 35 35 35 25 29 29 29 27 27 27 25 27 5 13 7 17 3 29 29 31 29 29 27 27 25 17 21 11 5 17 9 11 19 11 19 7 13 15 5 11 7 23 17 17 17 15 21 19 17 11 7 17 21 29
PART NO.
DA3-1605-000 DA3-1607-000 DA3-1609-000 DA3-1610-000 DA3-1611-000 DA3-2318-000 DA3-2337-000 DA3-2338-000 DA3-2340-000 DA3-2345-000 DF1-1686-000 DF1-1687-000 DF1-1688-000 DF1-1693-000 DF1-1694-000 DF1-1695-000 DF1-1703-000 DF1-1704-000 DF1-5058-000 DF1-5059-000 DF1-5064-000 DF1-5075-000 DF1-5078-000 DG1-4497-010 DG1-4500-000 DG1-4501-000 DG1-4502-000 DG1-4503-000 DG1-4504-000 DG1-4505-000 DG1-4506-000 DG3-0398-000 DG3-0399-000 DG3-0400-000 DG3-0401-000 DG3-0402-000 DG3-0403-000 DG3-0404-000 DG3-0405-000 DG3-0406-000 DG3-0407-000 DG3-0408-000 DG3-0409-000 DG3-0410-000 DG3-0418-000 DG3-0419-000 DG3-0432-000 DG3-0715-000 DH2-5172-000 DH2-5173-000 DH2-5174-000 DH2-5175-000 DH2-5176-000 DH2-5203-000 DH2-5204-000 DH2-5205-000 DH2-5206-000 DH2-5209-000 DH9-3009-000 DS1-0192-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C C C C B B B C C C C C C C C C C C C C B C C C C C C C B C C C C C C C C C C B B C C C B C C C C C C C C C C C B C
QTY
1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
CUSHION, RC2 SHEET, LCD2 CUSHION, CCD CORE RUBBER, INSULATION LABEL, HOLD MASK, CVF CAP, FRONT CAP, REAR CAP, FRONT COVER, HOUSING DRUM BASE ASSY ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE S ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE T BRAKE ASSY, TENSION RELEASE ASSY, TENSION REVIEW ARM ASSY IDLER ASSY BRAKE ASSY, S MIC ASSY TERMINAL ASSY, BATTERY ARM ASSY, CASSETTE HOLDER, RECORDER COVER ASSY, TOP GUIDE RAIL ASSY ROLLER ASSY, PINCH CHASSIS ASSY, MAIN MOTOR ASSY, LOADING MOTOR ASSY, CAPSTAN REEL ASSY, S REEL ASSY, T
REMARKS
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
COMPARTMENT ASSY, CASSETTE PCB ASSY, CAV PCB ASSY, CCD PCB ASSY, LCD PCB ASSY, JACK1 MVX250i E PCB ASSY, PCB ASSY, BACK LIGHT PCB ASSY, HINGE, LCD JACK2 KEY ASSY, LCD CVF
NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
HINGE ASSY, CVF ZOOM PHOTO ASSY SWITCH ASSY,POWER CONNECTOR ASSY, SHOE PCB ASSY, JACK1 FPC, ZOOM LENS FPC, FPC, FPC, FPC, FPC, FPC, FPC, LCD DETECT PHOTO ASSY ASSY MAIN-KEY MAIN-JACK1 MAIN-JACK2 ACS-MAIN CCD-CAV CVF-CAV CAV-JACK1
NEW NEW NEW MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW NEW NEW NEW MVX250i E NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
FPC, LCD-KEY FPC, SPEAKER CABLE, MAIN-JACK1 FILTER, IR SPRING, COIL (PINCH)
40
PARTS LIST
PAGE
27 27 27 25 25 33 33 33 17 17 17 17 5 5 9 9 5 5 11 21 5 33 19 9 5 5 19
PART NO.
DS1-0193-000 DS1-0198-000 DS1-0199-000 DY1-8500-000 DY1-8501-000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
C C C E B C C C C C C C B B B B B B B C B C B B B B B C C C C C C C B C C C C C C C F C F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 3 4 16 12 10 2 1 1 2 3 8 8 5 14 1
DESCRIPTION
SPRING, COIL (TENSION) SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE) SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE) DRUM ASSY CHASSIS ASSY, SLIDE
REMARKS
NEW
DY1-8528-000 000 DY1-8530-000 000 DY1-8531-000 000 DY1-8609-000 000 DY1-8645-000 DY1-8648-000 DY1-8649-000 DY1-8650-000 DY1-8651-000 DY1-8656-000 DY1-8657-000 DY1-8658-000 DY1-8660-000 DY1-8670-000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
COVER, BATTERY LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(E) MVX250i E, MVX200i E DC CABLE RECORDER UNIT, DMCIII PCB ASSY, MAIN PCB ASSY, MAIN PCB ASSY, MAIN COVER ASSY, JACK1 COVER ASSY, JACK2 COVER ASSY, RIGHT COVER ASSY, RIGHT RING ASSY, LENS RING ASSY, LENS LCD ASSY(SELECTION) MVX250i E MVX200i E MVX200 E MVX250i E MVX250i MVX200i MVX250i MVX200i E E E E, MVX200 E NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW
*1
DY1-8671-000 000 DY1-8673-000 000 DY1-8674-000 000 DY1-8678-000 000 DY1-8681-000 DY1-8682-000 DY1-8683-000 DY1-8703-000 VD7-2871-001 VD7-2871-501 VS1-6596-027 VS1-7098-021 WE8-6147-000 WE8-6201-000 WG2-5241-000 WG2-5272-000 WR1-5090-000 WS1-5524-000 WS1-5716-000 WS1-6113-000 WS1-6247-000 WS1-6263-000 WS1-6347-000 XA1-3170-507 XA1-7140-147 XA1-7170-207 XA1-7170-257 XA1-7170-307 XA1-7170-357 XA1-7170-407 XA1-7170-507 XA1-7170-557 XA4-5170-457 XA4-9170-357 XA4-9170-407 XA4-9170-457 XA4-9170-459 XA4-9170-507 XA4-9170-557 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CCD ASSY NEW COVER ASSY, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(PAL) MVX200 E NEW COVER ASSY, CVF INNER TOP NEW COVER ASSY, COVER ASSY, COVER ASSY, COVER ASSY, CHIP FUSE RIGHT FRONT FRONT CVF INNER MVX200 E NEW MVX250i E NEW MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW BOTTOM NEW NEW NEW
17 21 *2 19 11 7
CHIP FUSE CONNECTOR 27P CONNECTOR 21P CORE, FERRITE CORE, FERRITE LCD ASSY, CVF LCD ASSY SPEAKER JACK, MINI AV JACK, MIC JACK, JACK, JACK, JACK, SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW DC USB S-VIDEO DV
NEW NEW NEW
MVX250i E NEW NEW NEW
3 25,29,31 3,15,17 3,15,17,19 3,7 3,5,7,15 11 3 3 23 13,23 3,5,9,13,19 13,23 7 3,5,9,21 13
NEW NEW
41
PARTS LIST
PAGE
3 11 19 17 23 19 19
PART NO.
XA4-9170-607 XA4-9170-907 XA9-1166-000 XA9-1167-000 YH8-2015-000 000 000 000 000 000
CLASS
F F F F C C C
QTY
1 1 1 3 1 1 1
DESCRIPTION
SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW IG METER ASSY LENS, EYEPIECE 1 LENS, EYEPIECE 2
REMARKS
NEW
NEW NEW NEW
YN1-3090-000 000 YN1-3093-000 000
42
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM BLOCK DIAGRAMS CAMERA SECTION-1 CAMERA SECTION-2 CAMERA SECTION-3 CAMERA SECTION-4 SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION SERVO SECTION AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 POWER SUPPLY SECTION LCD P.C.B. SECTION JACK1,2 SECTION
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
LENS UNIT
TEMP SENS ZOOM SENS ZOOM MOTOR
MVX250i E,MVX200i E,MVX200 E

CCD P.C.B. SHOE CONNECTOR LCD
CN1070 18 19 2 1
LCD UNIT
IC1070
19P
FOCUS MOTOR FOCUS SENS IG METER
22P
LCD
22P 24P
12P
23P
2 CN4101 22 1 23
CVF P.C.B.
22 CN4102 1
ZOOM PHOTO KEY UNIT
OPERATION KEY UNIT
A1 B1
CN1001
A60 B60 26P
19P 19 1 18 2 CN1000 4P CN1200 1 2 IC1002 29P 29 28 8P 1 8 CN701 IC1200
120P IC1004 23 22
23P 1 2 CN1501 27P
BACK LIGHT
MIC UNIT
IC1001
CAV P.C.B.
IC1501
HINGE UNIT
IC801
JACK1 P.C.B.
CN42 2 1 CN41 8 4P IC1602 7 1 CN43 4 CN81 25 26 26P IC1601 CN3551 1 2 CN51 USB JACK AV JACK
8P
MIC JACK
LCD DETECT FPC

1 5P 120P 5 4P
MAIN P.C.B.
2
IC1810
CN3201 1 CN3212 DC JACK
2P
BATTERY TERMINAL
SPEAKER FPC UNIT

2P 2 CN3211 1
IC3203
IC1811 4P 5 5P CN3202 1 26P 1 CN903 4 1 2 CN901 25 26
IC4201
IC3201
12P A1 B1 A15 B15 A12 B12 CN2900 A1 B1 B1 IC2300 A1 CN1100
IC1101
LCD P.C.B.
23 24 IC902 CN902 24P
CN2101 25 26 11
CN102 12 2 1
CN103
A60 B60
8 CN101 1
8P
JACK2 P.C.B.
2 20 21 CN91 1 21P
26P 1 CN891 IC102 1 1 2 2 50 51 CN2102 21 20 10P 10 1 CN301 51P IC2000 1 7 CN2000 IC2302 CN300 11 1 2 18 18P 1 CN303 20 21 2 IC2301 IC100 IC1103 IC301
1 2 IC1102 IC901
IC300
KEY P.C.B.
1 CN100 10 CN302 1
CN31
CN11
DV JACK
21P
IC103
27P 7P 11P 10P 21P 51 50 CN100 51P CN101 1 2 CN102 27 26 1 10P 7P 11P 18P 21P 2
S JACK
10P
Metal contact (Pins' face down)

:
Metal contact (Pins' face up)

:
LOADING MOTOR
VIDEO HEAD
DRUM MOTOR
SLIDE CHASSIS
MAIN CHASSIS
Metal contact
Metal contact
DMC III
( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS II ) SD CARD
01
Mar. 2004
CANON INC. 2004
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
MAIN P.C.B. CN100 1 SP2 + 2 SP1 3 GND 4 CK 3V 5 ZOOM AD 6 PICT SW 7 KEY LED0 8 P5V 9 HALF PHOTO SW 10 PHOTO SW CN101 1 NET PW SW 2 VTR PW SW 3 CAM PW SW 4 START/STOP SW 5 GND 6 TAPE/CARD SW 7 GRN/P.AE 8 N.C CN102 1 GND 2 CARD DAT3 3 CARD CMD 4 GND 5 CARD SCK 6 CARD VSS1 7 GND 8 CARD DAT2 9 CARD DAT 10 GND 11 CARD DAT1 12 GND 13 GND 14 DVDD2.7V 15 CARD DET 16 CARD PAO 17 DVDD3V 18 N.C 19 KEY AD0 20 KEY AD1 21 KEY AD2 22 KEY AD4 23 LI 3V 24 CARD ACCESS LED 25 GND 26 PNL OP SW 27 PNL B/T SW 28 PANEL R 29 PANEL G 30 PANEL B 31 GND 32 GND 33 C SYNC 34 LCD2.7V 35 LCD2.7V 36 LCD5V 37 LCD8.5V 38 LCD CS 39 LCD EEP CS 40 LCD EEP SOUT 41 LCD EEP SCK 42 LCD EEP SIN1 43 LCD ON 44 LCD BL ON 45 VTR UNREG 46 VTR UNREG 47 VTR UNREG 48 MO GND 49 MO GND 50 MO GND 51 MO GND CN103 A1 MODE RESET A2 EPM A3 CE A4 CNVSS A5 N.C A6 DEBCLK A7 GND A8 DEBUD A9 GND A10 DEBDD A11 GND A12 XDEBEN A13 GND A14 GND A15 E3V+LI3V B1 GND B2 FLASH CLK B3 FLASH RST B4 FLASH RXD1 B5 FLASH TXD1 B6 N.C B7 DVDD3V B8 CG CS B9 EEP/CG CLK B10 EEP/CG SO B11 DOT CLK B12 OSD I0 B13 OSD I1 B14 VIC HD B15 VIC VD CN300 1 U 2 U 3 V 4 V 5 DFG 6 DPG 7 SENS COM 8 SENS GARD 9 COIL COM 10 W 11 W CN301 1 LOAD(+) 2 LOAD(+) 3 MSW VSS 4 MSW VCC 5 MSW SENS 6 LOAD() 7 LOAD() 8 DEW + 9 DEW 10 N.C MAIN P.C.B. CN302 1 UCOIL 2 UCOIL 3 WCOIL 4 WCOIL 5 VCOIL 6 VCOIL 7 CH 8 W 9 W+ 10 C H + 11 U + 12 U 13 V + 14 V 15 CFG2 16 CFG GND 17 CFG VCC 18 CFG1 CN303 1 BOT E 2 BOT C 3 MIC GND 4 MIC3 5 REC PRF 6 MIC2 7 MIC1 8 TIN 9 TOUT 10 TIN + 11 TOUT + 12 C IN 13 CIN GND 14 LED A 15 LED K 16 SIN 17 SOUT 18 SIN + 19 SOUT + 20 EOT E 21 EOT C CN891 1 SHOE UNREG 2 SHOE UNREG 3 POW GND 4 POW GND 5 POW GND 6 ID-1 7 ST VDHGL 8 ST STSP 9 ID-2 10 ADV MIC GND 11 ADV MIC L 12 ADV/EXT MIC R MAIN P.C.B. CN1100 A1 ADV/EXT MIC R A2 ADV MIC GND A3 GND A4 RAWDATA[0] A5 RAWDATA[1] A6 RAWDATA[2] A7 RAWDATA[3] A8 GND A9 RAWDATA[4] A10 RAWDATA[5] A11 RAWDATA[6] A12 RAWDATA[7] A13 GND A14 RAWDATA[8] A15 RAWDATA[9] A16 RAWDATA[10] A17 RAWDATA[11] A18 GND A19 DSP CLK A20 GND A21 XTGHD A22 XTGVD A23 VGATE A24 F RES SW A25 Z RES SW A26 MO GND A27 MO GND A28 CAM3V A29 CAM3V A30 CCD15V A31 CCD7V A32 GND A33 GND A34 GND A35 GND A36 AMCK A37 WCK A38 AIF SO A39 AIF CS A40 AIF SCLK A41 XPDI A42 REC MUTE A43 A MUTE A44 EXT DET A45 HP MUTE A46 SOUND A47 HP ON A48 SP + A49 SP A50 SP GND A51 SP GND A52 AA4.7V A53 AA4.7V A54 AA2.7V A55 AA2.7V A56 AA GND A57 AA GND A58 V I/O/HP R A59 AV L/HP L A60 AV R B1 ADV MIC L B2 ADV MIC GND B3 PWM IRIS B4 PWM ND B5 PWM FA B6 PWM FB B7 PWM ZA B8 PWM ZB B9 DA LOAD B10 CAM SCK B11 CAM SO B12 AFE CS B13 F PSB B14 Z PSB B15 IRIS PSB B16 IRIS CL B17 ND PSB B18 DA CFG B19 SUB CONT B20 AFE RST B21 I ENC B22 GND B23 ND ENC B24 LED RET B25 TEMP B26 P GYRO B27 Y GYRO B28 I SW B29 P GY OUT B30 AVDD2.7V B31 Y GY OUT B32 DVDD2.7V B33 P5V B34 P5V B35 AUD2 I B36 MACS1 I B37 LRCK B38 C SYNC B39 EVF COM B40 GND B41 GND B42 EVF R B43 EVF G B44 EVF B B45 GND B46 EVF 3V ON B47 EVF 8.5V ON B48 VF B EVF B49 VF G EVF B50 VF R EVF B51 GND B52 EVF HD B53 EVF SEN B54 EVF EEP CS B55 LCD EEP SCK B56 LCD EEP SIN1 B57 LCD EEP SOUT B58 LCD8.5V B59 LCD2.7V B60 LCD2.7V CN2000 1 HA GND 2 H1A 3 H1B 4 HA GND 5 H2A 6 H2B 7 HA GND MAIN P.C.B. CN2101 1 AV GND 2 AV L/HP L 3 AV R 4 AV GND 5 V I/O/HP R 6 AV GND 7 AV DET 8 CAM LED 9 AVDD2.7V 10 Y GY OUT 11 GY GND 12 P GY OUT 13 GND 14 GND 15 D + 16 N.C 17 D 18 GND 19 GND 20 VBUS 21 P5V 22 GND 23 DC J SW 24 RMC IN 25 CHAGE LED 26 VTR UNREG CN2102 1 YC GND 2 C I/O 3 YC GND 4 YC GND 5 YC GND 6 Y I/O 7 S DET 8 YC GND 9 YC GND 10 EJECT SW 11 DIAL CW 12 DIAL CCW 13 KEY AD3 14 GND 15 GND 16 TPA 17 XTPA 18 XTPB 19 TPB 20 GND 21 N.C CN2900 A1 V I/O A2 GND A3 VTR POW SW A4 N.C A5 CAM POW SW A6 FCH O A7 TCK A8 SWP A9 GND A10 PBRF A11 EVF R A12 EVF G B1 EVF HD B2 MODE RESET B3 VTR ON IC3201 B4 VTR UNREG B5 MIC2 B6 MIC3 B7 TRST B8 TMS B9 TDI B10 TDO B11 EVF COM B12 EVF B CN3201 1 DC 2 DC + CN3202 1 BATT 2 BATT 3 BATT INFO AD 4 BATT + 5 BATT + CAV P.C.B. CN701 1 EXT L 2 MIC GND 3 ADV/EXT MIC R 4 EXT P DET 5 INT MIC GND 6 INT MIC R 7 INT MIC GND 8 INT MIC L CN1000 1 N.C 2 CCD OUT 3 GND 4 VL(7.5V) 5 CAM3V 6 SUB SW 7 V1 8 V2 9 V3 10 V4 11 VSUB 12 GND 13 RESET 14 GND 15 H1 16 GND 17 H2 18 GND 19 VH(+15V) CAV P.C.B. CN1001 A1 ADV/EXT MIC R A2 ADV MIC GND A3 GND A4 RAWDATA[0] A5 RAWDATA[1] A6 RAWDATA[2] A7 RAWDATA[3] A8 GND A9 RAWDATA[4] A10 RAWDATA[5] A11 RAWDATA[6] A12 RAWDATA[7] A13 GND A14 RAWDATA[8] A15 RAWDATA[9] A16 RAWDATA[10] A17 RAWDATA[11] A18 GND A19 DSP CLK A20 GND A21 XTGHD A22 XTGVD A23 VGATE A24 F RES SW A25 Z RES SW A26 MO GND A27 MO GND A28 CAM3V A29 CAM3V A30 CCD15V A31 CCD7V A32 GND A33 GND A34 GND A35 A CLK GND A36 AMCK A37 WCK A38 AIF SO A39 AIF CS A40 AIF SCLK A41 XPDI A42 REC MUTE A43 A MUTE A44 EXT DET A45 HP MUTE A46 SOUND A47 HP ON A48 SP + A49 SP A50 SP GND A51 SP GND A52 AA4.7V A53 AA4.7V A54 AA2.7V A55 AA2.7V A56 AA GND A57 AA GND A58 V I/O/HP R A59 AV L/HP L A60 AV R B1 ADV MIC L B2 ADV MIC GND B3 PWM IRIS B4 PWM ND B5 PWM FA B6 PWM FB B7 PWM ZA B8 PWM ZB B9 DA LOAD B10 CAM SCK B11 CAM SO B12 AFE CS B13 F PSB B14 Z PSB B15 IRIS PSB B16 IRIS CL B17 ND PSB B18 DA CFG B19 SUB CONT B20 AFE RST B21 I ENC B22 GND B23 ND ENC B24 LED RET B25 TEMP B26 P GYRO B27 Y GYRO B28 I SW B29 P GY OUT B30 AVDD2.7V B31 Y GY OUT B32 DVDD2.7V B33 P5V B34 P5V B35 AUD2 I B36 MACS1 I B37 LRCK B38 C SYNC B39 EVF COM B40 GND B41 GND B42 EVF R B43 EVF G B44 EVF B B45 GND B46 EVF 3V ON B47 EVF 8.5V ON B48 VF B EVF B49 VF G EVF B50 VF R EVF B51 GND B52 EVF HD B53 EVF SEN B54 EVF EEP CS B55 LCD EEP SCK B56 LCD EEP SIN1 B57 LCD EEP SOUT B58 LCD8.5V B59 LCD2.7V B60 LCD2.7V CAV P.C.B. CN1200 1 ND DRIVE() 2 ND DRIVE(+) 3 ND HALL IN(+) 4 ND HALL OUT(+) 5 ND HALL IN() 6 ND HALL OUT() 7 GND 8 ZOOM B 9 ZOOMB 10 ZOOMA 11 ZOOM A 12 FOCUSA 13 FOCUS A 14 FOCUS B 15 FOCUSB 16 TEMP 17 TEMP 2.7V 18 FOCUS VCC 19 FOCUS LED 20 FOCUS SENS 21 ZOOM SENS 22 ZOOM VCC 23 ZOOM LED 24 IG DRIVE() 25 IG DRIVE(+) 26 IG HALL IN(+) 27 IG HALL OUT(+) 28 IG HALL IN() 29 IG HALL OUT() CN1501 1 VSS 2 XSTH 3 STH 4 CKH1 5 CKH2 6 VDD 7 G 8 R 9 B 10 BL2.7V 11 DSG 12 XDSG 13 DSD 14 VBB 15 ENB 16 XENB 17 XSTV 18 STV 19 CKV2 20 CKV1 21 COM 22 P5V 23 P5V JACK1 P.C.B. CN42 1 EXT L 2 MIC GND 3 ADV/EXT MIC R 4 EXT P DET 5 INT MIC GND 6 INT MIC R 7 INT MIC GND 8 INT MIC L CN43 1 INT MIC GND 2 INT MIC R 3 INT MIC GND 4 INT MIC L CN51 1 VTR UNREG 2 CHAGE LED 3 RMC IN 4 DC J SW 5 GND 6 P5V 7 VBUS 8 GND 9 GND 10 D 11 N.C 12 D + 13 GND 14 GND 15 P GY OUT 16 GY GND 17 Y GY OUT 18 AVDD2.7V 19 CAM LED 20 AV DET 21 AV GND 22 V I/O/HP R 23 AV GND 24 AV R 25 AV L/HP L 26 AV GND CN3211 1 DC + 2 DC KEY P.C.B. CN100 1 MMC RSV 2 MMC CMD 3 MMC VSS1-1 4 MMC VDD 5 MMC SCK 6 MMC VSS1-2 7 MMC DAT 8 MMC DAT1 9 MMC DAT2 10 CARD PRO 11 GND 12 CARD DET 13 M GND CN101 1 MO GND 2 MO GND 3 MO GND 4 VTR UNREG 5 VTR UNREG 6 VTR UNREG 7 LCD BL ON 8 LCD ON 9 LCD EEP SIN1 10 LCD EEP SCK 11 LCD EEP SOUT 12 LCD EEP CS 13 LCD CS 14 LCD8.5V 15 LCD5V 16 LCD2.7V 17 LCD2.7V 18 C SYNC 19 GND 20 GND 21 PANEL B 22 PANEL G 23 PANEL R 24 PNL B/T SW 25 PNL OP SW 26 GND 27 CARD ACCESS LED 28 LI 3V 29 KEY AD4 30 KEY AD2 31 KEY AD1 32 KEY AD0 33 N.C 34 DVDD3V 35 CARD PRO 36 CARD DET 37 DVDD2.7V 38 GND 39 GND 40 CARD DAT1 41 GND 42 CARD DAT 43 CARD DAT2 44 GND 45 CARD VSS1 46 CARD SCK 47 GND 48 CARD CMD 49 CARD DAT3 50 GND 51 GND CN102 1 PNL B/T SW 2 GND 3 PANEL R 4 PANEL G 5 PANEL B 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 C SYNC 10 LCD3V 11 LCD3V 12 LCD5V 13 LCD8.5V 14 LCD CS 15 LCD EEP CS 16 LCD EEP SOUT 17 LCD EEP SCK 18 LCD EEP SIN1 19 LCD ON 20 LCD BL ON 21 VTR UNREG 22 VTR UNREG 23 VTR UNREG 24 MO GND 25 MO GND 26 MO GND 27 MO GND
JACK2 P.C.B. CN91 1 GND 2 TPB 3 XTPB 4 XTPA 5 TPA 6 GND 7 GND 8 KEY AD3 9 DIAL CCW 10 DIAL CW 11 EJECT SW 12 YC GND 13 YC GND 14 S DET 15 Y I/O 16 YC GND 17 YC GND 18 YC GND 19 C I/O 20 YC GND 21 N.C
LCD P.C.B. CN901 1 MO GND 2 MO GND 3 MO GND 4 VTR UNREG 5 VTR UNREG 6 VTR UNREG 7 LCD BL ON 8 LCD ON 9 LCD EEP SIN1 10 LCD EEP SCK 11 LCD EEP SOUT 12 LCD EEP CS 13 LCD CS 14 LCD8.5V 15 LCD5V 16 LCD2.7V 17 LCD2.7V 18 C SYNC 19 GND 20 GND 21 GND 22 PANEL B 23 PANEL G 24 PANEL R 25 GND SW 26 PANEL BT SW 27 PANEL BT SW CN902 1 TEST 2 RGT 3 BLUE 4 RED 5 GREEN 6 PSIG 7 HCK1 8 HCK2 9 WIDE 10 TEST 11 REF 12 HST 13 PCG 14 XSTBY 15 VSSG 16 N.C 17 VSS 18 VDD 19 DWN 20 EN 21 VCK 22 VST 23 CS 24 COM CN903 1 PANEL BT SW 2 GND SW 3 LCD2.7V 4 N.C
CVF P.C.B. CN4101 1 P5V 2 COM 3 CKV1 4 CKV2 5 STV 6 XSTV 7 XENB 8 ENB 9 VBB 10 DSD 11 XDSG 12 DSG 13 BL2.7V 14 B 15 R 16 G 17 VDD 18 CKH2 19 CKH1 20 STH 21 XSTH 22 VSS 23 VSS CN4102 1 COM 2 CKV1 3 CKV2 4 STV 5 XSTV 6 XENB 7 ENB 8 CSV 9 VBB 10 DSD 11 XDSG 12 DSG 13 B 14 R 15 G 16 CSH 17 VDD 18 CKH2 19 CKH1 20 VSS 21 STH 22 XSTH
CCD P.C.B. CN1070 1 N.C 2 VH(+15V) 3 GND 4 H2 5 GND 6 H1 7 GND 8 RESET 9 GND 10 VSUB 11 V4 12 V3 13 V2 14 V1 15 SUB SW 16 CAM3V 17 VL(7.5V) 18 GND 19 CCD OUT
CAMERA SECTION-1
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL

CAV P.C.B. (1/2)
SUB CONT
CCD P.C.B.
J2 CLI
HD D2 VD D1
XTGHD XTGVD DSP CLK VGATE AFE RST CAM SCK AFE CS CAM SO RAWDATA (11) RAWDATA (10) RAWDATA (9) RAWDATA (8) RAWDATA (7) RAWDATA (6) RAWDATA (5) RAWDATA (4) RAWDATA (3) RAWDATA (2) RAWDATA (1) RAWDATA(0)
H2 12 H1 11 RG 10 SUB 13 V4 V3 V2 V1 1 2 3 4 CAM 3V CN1070 CAM 3V H2 H1 RESET VSUB V4 V3 V2 V1 SUB SW CCD OUT VL ( 7.5) VH( + 15V) CN1000 16 4 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 19 17 2 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 15 17 19 CCD OUT VL( 7.5V) CAM3V SUB SW V1 V2 V3 V4 VSUB RESET H1 H2 VH( + 15V)
IC1001 SN74LVC/GU04DCK3 INVERTER

3 1
DCLK2/FD C1 SYNC/VGATE C9 OUT CONT D9 SCK J10
X1001
IC1002 AD9929BBCZ TG/CDS /AGC/AD /V-DRIVER

K5 CCD IN
SL K10 SDATA K9 D11 A2 B2 A3 B3
CCD 7V CAM3V H9 V4 G10 V3 E9 V2 D10 V1 VSUB CCD15V RESET G9 SUBCK H1 RG G1 H1
IC1070 ICX475AK-K CCD

Q1074 RC 6 Q1071 Q1073 VOUT 8
A4 B5 B6 A6 B7 A7 A8 D0 B8
IC1004 MM1612JM 2.8V REGULATOR

VL 14 VDD 7 2.8V 4 V OUT V IN 5 CAM3V
F1 H2
CN701 TO JACK 1,2 SECTION JACK1 P.C.B. CN42 1 3 5 8 EXT L ADV/EXT MIC R INT MIC R INT MIC L ADV MIC L EXT DET Q807 ADV/EXT MIC R
Q821 A MUTE
CAM SCK CAM SO
TO CAMERA SECTION-2 CAV P.C.B.
Q822,Q823 MUTE DL
Q823 AA4.7V P5V AA2.7V POWER ON MUTE AA4.7V
32
19
47
34
41
40 45 42
LRCK AMCK WCK AUD2 I MACS1 I
3 4 5 6 7 AUDIO I/F CONTROLLER ALC1
MIC POWER
PRE AMP 28
HPF FIL1 FIL2 EQ FIL3
+ 2db to 2db
24db + 12db 0db
26 OVF DETECT OFFSET CANCEL HPF OFFSET CANCEL HPF ADC 44 39 PRE AMP 27 25 Q803 Q805
MIXER & DEM
DAC
OPGA
MIX
36
Q804 Q806
V I/O/HP R
IC801 AK4567 AUDIO INTERFACE

LINE OUT AIF SO CONTROL REGISTER I/F
31 HP AMP 29 35 21 ALC2 SPK AMP 20 13 AIF CS 14 AIF SCLK 16 REC MUTE 17 XPDI 23 24 2 SP + Q802 SP Q824 HP ON Q801 Q825 HP MUTE
12
CAM3V CCD15V CCD 7V AA4.7V AA2.7V P5V
CN1001 DSP CLK XTGHD XTGVD VGATE AFE CS SUB CONT AFE RST RAWDATA(0) RAWDATA(1) RAWDATA(2) RAWDATA(3) RAWDATA(4) RAWDATA(5) RAWDATA(6) RAWDATA(7) RAWDATA(8) RAWDATA(9) RAWDATA(10) RAWDATA(11) AV L/HP L AV R ADV/EXT MIC R CA-3 EXT DET HP MUTE AV-1 V I/O/HP R ADV MIC L SOUND AMCK WCK AIF SO AIF CS AIF SCLK XPDI REC MUTE SP + SP LRCK AUD2 I MACS/I CAM3V CAM3V CCD15V CCD 7V AA4.7V AA4.7V AA2.7V AA2.7V P5V P5V
A19 A21 A22 A23 B12 B19 B20 A4 A5 A6 A7 A9 A10 A11 A12 A14 A15 A16 A17 A59 A60 A1 A43 A44 A45 A47 A58 B1 A46 A36 A37 A38 A39 A40 A41 A42 A48 A49 B37 B35 B36 A28 A29 A30 A31 A52 A53 A54 A55 B33 B34
TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN P.C.B. CN1100
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CN1100
TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B. CN1100
01
Mar. 2004
CANON INC. 2004
CAMERA SECTION-2
CAV P.C.B.(2/2)
ND HALL OUT ( ) ND HALL OUT ( + ) ND HALL IN ( + ) ND HALL IN ( ) ND DRIVE ( + ) TO LENS UNIT CN1200 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 14 15 12 9 8 10 11 25 24 26 27 28 29 18 21 16 20 23 19 ND HALL OUT ( ) ND HALL IN ( ) ND HALL OUT ( + ) ND HALL IN ( + ) ND DRIVE ( + ) ND DRIVE ( ) FOCUS A FOCUS B FOCUS B FOCUS A ZOOM B ZOOM B ZOOM A ZOOM A IG DRIVE ( + ) IG DRIVE ( ) IG HALL IN ( + ) IG HALL OUT ( + ) IG HALL IN ( ) IG HALL OUT ( ) FOCUS VCC ZOOM SENS TEMP FOCUS SENS ZOOM LED FOCUS LED ND DRIVE ( ) 37 HALL1 OUT 36 HALL1 + OUT 35 HALL1 + IN 33 HALL1 IN 56 OUT 6 58 OUT 6B IN 6 54 EN 6 55 DAC 3 OUT 53 AELEV 1 38 IG FOCUS A IG FOCUS B IG FOCUS B IG FOCUS A IG ZOOM B IG ZOOM B IG ZOOM A IG ZOOM A 26 OUT 2 20 OUT 3 22 OUT 3B 24 OUT 2B 7 6 9 OUT 5B OUT 5 OUT 4B IN 1 63 IN 2 13 IN 3 17 IN 4 15 IN 5 2 PWM ND HD PSB DA CFG ND ENC PWM IRIS PWM FA PWM FB PWM ZA PWM ZB Z PSB VDD 12 CAM 3V
EN 4 5 16 EN 3 18 EN 2 14
F PSB CAM SO CAM SCK TO CAMERA SECTION-1 CAV P.C.B.
10 OUT 4
IC1200 BH9921KS2 LENS DRIVE

IG DRIVE ( + ) AVDD 2.7V IG DRIVE ( ) IG HALL IN ( + ) IG HALL OUT ( + ) IG HALL IN ( ) IG HALL OUT ( ) Q1200 GYRLEV2 48 P5V 8 VM4.5 GYRLEV1 42 AELEV2 31 DI CLK 3 4 62 OUT1 60 OUT1B 28 HALL2 + IN 29 HALL2 + OUT 27 HALL2 IN 30 HALL2 OUT LD 5 DA LOAD IRIS CL IRIS PSB I SW Y GY OUT P GY OUT P GYRO Y GYRO I ENC CAM SO CAM SCK CN1001 ND ENC ND PSB PWM ND PWM FA PWM FB PWM ZA PWM ZB Z PSB F PSB PMW IRIS DA CFG Y GY OUT P GY OUT DA LOAD IRIS CL IRIS PSB I SW P GYRO Y GYRO I ENC CAM SO CAM SCK Z RES SW TEMP F RES SW LED RET VF B EVF VF G EVF VF R EVF CSYNC EVF HD EVF COM EVF G EVF R EVF B LCD EEP SCK LCD EEP SOUT EVF SEN EVF 3V ON EVF 8.5V ON EVF EEP CS LCD EEP SIN 1 AVDD 2.7V DVDD 2.7V LCD 8.5V LCD 2.7V LCD 2.7V B23 B17 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B14 B13 B3 B18 B29 B31 B9 B16 B15 B28 B26 B27 B21 B11 B10 A25 B25 A24 B24 B48 B49 B50 B38 B52 B39 B43 B42 B44 B55 B57 B53 B46 B47 B54 B56 B30 B32 B58 B59 B60
IRIS CONT 64 EN1 1
TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN P.C.B. CN1100
GAIN1 2 51 GYRIN1 40 GYRIN2 45
21 VM3 25 VM2 61 VM1
TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-4 MAIN P.C.B. CN1100
DVDD2.7V AVDD2.7V
19 VDD 32 VC1 46 VC2
CVF P.C.B.
BACK LIGHT Q4101 CN4101 P5V BL2.7V COM CKV1 CKV2 STV XSTV XENB ENB DSD XDSG DSG B R G VDD CKH2 CKH1 STH XSTH 1 13 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 11 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 13 6 10 22 23 CN1501 XSTH STH CKH1 CKH2 G R B DSG XDSG ENB XENB XSTV STV CKV2 CKV1 COM DSD VDD BL2.7V P5V P5V XSTH STH CKH1 CKH2 G R B DSG XDSG ENB XENB XSTV A8.5V STV Q1508 P5V CKV2 CKV1 COM DSD 17 XSTH 18 STH 20 CKH 1 19 CKH 2 43 GOUT 45 ROUT 40 BOUT 24 DSG 23 XDSG 30 ENB 29 XENB 25 XSTV 26 STV 27 CKV2 28 CKV1 38 COMOUT 50 DSDOUT 39 VCCCOM A8.5V 47 VCC 2 13 BLSW VCC 1 49 SYNC IN 57 VDD 1 1 EVF A2.7V AVDD 2.7V DVDD 2.7V HD 15 HDIN 60 BIN 55 GIN 54 RIN 53 EVF HD C SYNC VF B EVF VF G EVF VF R EVF
LCD (CVF)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 21 22
CN4102 COM CKV1 CKV2 STV XSTV XENB ENB DSD XDSG DSG B R G VDD CKH2 CKH1 STH XSTH
IC1501 LV4141W EVF DRIVER
Q1510 LCD 8.5V SCLK DATA LOAD 8 7 6 LCD EEP SCK LCD EEP SOUT EVF SEN LCD 2.7V Q1506 Q1507
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CN1100
VDD 2 11 VDD 0 12
01
Mar. 2004
CANON INC. 2004
CAMERA SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B.(1/7)
USB SIGNAL

MADDR L14
MADDR L10
MADDR L11
MADDR L13
MDQM L(3)
MDQM L(2)
MDQM L(1)
MDQM L(0)
MADDR L0
MADDR L1
MADDR L2
MADDR L3
MADDR L4
MADDR L5
MADDR L6
MADDR L7
MADDR L8
MADDR L9
XMCAS L
XMRAS L
XMWE L
XMCS L
MCKE L
MCLK L
C10
D11
C11
D12
C11
D13
D15
C13
MADDR L(10)
MADDR L(11)
MADDR L(13)
MADDR L(14)
MADDR L(0)
MADDR L(1)
MADDR L(2)
MADDR L(3)
MADDR L(4)
MADDR L(5)
MADDR L(6)
MADDR L(7)
MADDR L(8)
MADDR L(9)
XMCAS L
MDQM L(3)
MDQM L(2)
MDQM L(1)
17 /WE
18 /CAS
19 /RAS
20 /CS
68 CLK
67 CKE
59 DQM3
28 DQM2
71 DQM1
16 DQM0
25 A0
26 A1
27 A2
60 A3
61 A4
62 A5
63 A6
64 A7
65 A8
66 A9
24 A10/AP
21 NC2
22 BA0
23 BA1 DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 2 4 5 7 8 MDATA L0 MDATA L1 MDATA L2 MDATA L3 MDATA L4 MDATA L5 MDATA L6 MDATA L7 MDATA L8 MDATA L9 MDATA L10 MDATA L11 MDATA L12 MDATA L13 MDATA L14 MDATA L15 MDATA L16 MDATA L17 MDATA L18 MDATA L19 MDATA L20 MDATA L21 MDATA L22 MDATA L23 MDATA L24 MDATA L25 MDATA L26 MDATA L27 MDATA L28 MDATA L29 MDATA L30 MDATA L31 C21 B20 C20 D20 A19 B19 D19 A18 B18 C18 D18 A17 B17 D17 A16 C16 D8 A7 B7 C7 D7 B6 C6 D6 A5 C5 D5 B4 C4 A3 B3 A2 MDATA L(0) MDATA L(1) MDATA L(2) MDATA L(3) MDATA L(4) MDATA L(5) MDATA L(6) MDATA L(7) MDATA L(8) MDATA L(9) MDATA L(10) MDATA L(11) MDATA L(12) MDATA L(13) MDATA L(14) MDATA L(15) MDATA L(16) MDATA L(17) MDATA L(18) MDATA L(19) MDATA L(20) MDATA L(21) MDATA L(22) MDATA L(23) MDATA L(24) MDATA L(25) MDATA L(26) MDATA L(27) MDATA L(28) MDATA L(29) MDATA L(30) MDATA L(31)
MDQM L(0)
XMCAS L
XMWE L
XMCS L
MCKE L
MCLK L
C14
A10
B11
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B15
B14
D9
C9
C8
B9
A9
A8
EADDR M(0) EADDR M(1) EADDR M(2) EADDR M(3)
V22 V23 V24 V25
DQ5 10 DQ6 11 DQ7 13 DQ8 74 DQ9 76 DQ10 77 DQ11 79 DQ12 80 DQ13 82
EADDR M(4) W22 EADDR M(5) W23 EADDR M(6) W24 EADDR M(7) W25 EADDR M(8) EADDR M(9) EADDR M(10) Y23 Y24 Y25
EADDR M(11) AA22 EADDR M(12) AA23 EADDR M(13) AA24 EADDR M(14) AB25 EADDR M(15) AB22 EADDR M(16) AB23 EADDR M(17) AB24 EADDR M(18) AC25 EADDR M(19) AC23 EADDR M(20) AC24 EADDR M(21) AC25 EADDR M(22) AD24 EDATA M(0) AD23 EDATA M(1) AE23 EDATA M(2) AD22 EDATA M(3) AE22 EADDR(0) to (22) EDATA(0) to (15) RDY XECS1 XEWRL XEWRU XERD XDREQ XDACK TRST TMS TCK MACS TDO D+ D USB FS EN MACS XRST TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B.
IC1102 HY57V643220CTP-7 SDRAM
DQ14 83 DQ15 85 DQ16 31 DQ17 33 DQ18 34 DQ19 36 DQ20 37 DQ21 39 DQ22 40 DQ23 42 DQ24 45 DQ25 47 DQ26 48 DQ27 50 DQ28 51 DQ29 53 DQ30 54 DQ31 56
IC1103(1/2) MB87M1982BGL-GE1 DIGIC DV
EDATA M(4) AC21 EDATA M(5) AD21 EDATA M(6) AE21 EDATA M(7) AB20 EDATA M(8) AC20 EDATA M(9) AD20 EDATA M(10) AB19 EDATA M(11) AC19
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4
2 4 5 7 8
MDATA U0 MDATA U1 MDATA U2 MDATA U3 MDATA U4 MDATA U5 MDATA U6 MDATA U7 MDATA U8 MDATA U9 MDATA U10 MDATA U11 MDATA U12 MDATA U13 MDATA U14 MDATA U15 MDATA U16 MDATA U17 MDATA U18 MDATA U19 MDATA U20 MDATA U21 MDATA U22 MDATA U23 MDATA U24 MDATA U25 MDATA U26 MDATA U27 MDATA U28 MDATA U29 MDATA U30 MDATA U31
U25 U22 T25 T24 T22 R25 R24 R23 R22 P25 P24 P23 N25 M24 M25 M24 B25 C25 D25 A24 B24 C24 D24 A23 B23 C23 D23 A22 B22 C22 A21 B21
MDATA U(0) MDATA U(1) MDATA U(2) MDATA U(3) MDATA U(4) MDATA U(5) MDATA U(6) MDATA U(7) MDATA U(8) MDATA U(9) MDATA U(10) MDATA U(11) MDATA U(12) MDATA U(13) MDATA U(14) MDATA U(15) MDATA U(16) MDATA U(17) MDATA U(18) MDATA U(19) MDATA U(20) MDATA U(21) MDATA U(22) MDATA U(23) MDATA U(24) MDATA U(25) MDATA U(26) MDATA U(27) MDATA U(28) MDATA U(29) MDATA U(30) MADDR U(11) MADDR U(13) MDQM U(3) MDQM U(2) MDQM U(1) MDQM C(0) MDATA U(31) MADDR U(10) MADDR U(0) MADDR U(1) MADDR U(2) MADDR U(3) MADDR U(4) MADDR U(5) MADDR U(6) MADDR U(7) MADDR U(8) MADDR U(9) MADDR U(14) XMCAS U XMCAS U
EDATA M(12) AD19 EDATA M(13) AE19 EDATA M(14) AD18 EDATA M(15) AE18
DQ5 10 DQ6 11 DQ7 13 DQ8 74 DQ9 76 DQ10 77 DQ11 79 DQ12 80 DQ13 82 DQ14 83 DQ15 85
MCCLK A MCDT A(3) MCDT A(2) MCDT A(1) MCDT A(0) MCCMD A
W1 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 W2
CARD SCK CARD DAT3 CARD DAT2 CARD DAT1 CARD DAT CARD CMD CARD SCK CARD DAT3 CARD DAT2 CARD DAT1 CARD DAT CARD CMD TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN P.C.B.
RDY AB16 XECS M AC17 XEWRL M AB18 XEWRU M AB17 XERD M AC16 DREQ (0) AC15 XDACK (0) AE17 TRST TMS TCK TDO T2 T3 T1 T4 MACS TDO D+ D XECSI XEWRL XEWRU XERD XDREQ XDACK
IC1101 HY57V643220CTP-7 SDRAM
DQ16 31 DQ17 33 DQ18 34 DQ19 36 DQ20 37 DQ21 39 DQ22 40 DQ23 42 DQ24 45 DQ25 47 DQ26 48 DQ27 50 DQ28 51 DQ29 53 A10/AP
DP USB AE14 DN USB AD13
USB FS EN Q3502 XRESET AD1 MACS XRST
STROBE TMG(1)
J2
ST STSP
DQM3
DQM2
DQM1
DQM0
DQ30 54 NC2 BA0 BA1 DQ31 56
/CAS
/RAS
CKE
CLK
/WE
TO POWER SUPPLY SECTION MAIN P.C.B.
/CS
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
XMWE U
XMCS U
17
18
19
20
68
67
59
28
71
16
25
26
27
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
24
21
22
23
MADDR L10
MADDR L11
MADDR L13
MADDR L14
MCKE U
MCLK U
M23
MDQM L(3)
MDQM L(2)
MDQM L(1)
MDQM L(0)
MADDR L0
MADDR L1
MADDR L2
MADDR L3
MADDR L4
MADDR L5
MADDR L6
MADDR L7
MADDR L8
01
Mar. 2004
MADDR L9
XMCAS L
XMRAS L
XMWE L
XMCS L
MCKE L
MCLK L
M22
G22
G23
G24
G25
H22
H24
E25
K23
E24
K25
K24
E23
F23
F24
F25
L22
L25
L23
L24
J22
J23
J25
CANON INC. 2004
CAMERA SECTION-4
MAIN P.C.B.(2/7)
A11 A12 B12 B11 B1 CN2900 EVF R EVF G EVF B EVF COM EVF HD
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
N.C
TO CAMERA SECTION-1 CAV P.C.B. CN1001
B52 B39 B42 B43 B44 B30 B32 B58 B59 B60 A52 A53 A54 A55 B33 B34 A28 A29 A30 A31 A4 A5 A6 A7 A9 A10 A11 A12 A14 A15 A16 A17 A19 A23 A21 A22 B35 B36 B20 B12 B11 B10 B5 B6 B7 B8 B14 B13 A25 A24 B50 B48 B49 B38 B9 B24 B28 B25 B26 B27 B21 B16 B15 B3 A43 B23 B17 B4 A44 B19 A37 B37
CN1100 EVF HD EVF COM EVF R EVF G EVF B AVDD2.7V DVDD2.7V LCD8.5V LCD2.7V LCD2.7V AA4.7V AA4.7V AA2.7V AA2.7V P5V P5V CAM 3V CAM 3V CCD 15V CCD 7V RAWDATA (0) RAWDATA (1) RAWDATA (2) RAWDATA (3) RAWDATA (4) RAWDATA (5) RAWDATA (6) RAWDATA (7) RAWDATA (8) RAWDATA (9) RAWDATA (10) RAWDATA (11) DSP CLK VGATE XTGHD XTGVD AUD2 I MACS1 I AFE RST AFE CS CAM SO CAM SCK PWM FA PWM FB PWM ZA PWM ZB Z PSB F PSB Z RES SW F RES SW VF R EVF VF B EVF VF G EVF CSYNC DA LOAD LED RET I SW TEMP P GYRO Y GYRO I ENC IRIS CL IRIS PSB PWM IRIS A MUTE ND ENC ND PSB PWM ND EXT DET SUB CONT WCK LRCK
AVDD2.7V DVDD2.7V LCD8.5V LCD2.7V AA4.7V AA2.7V P5V CAM 3V CCD 15V CCD 7V E3 E2 E1 D4 D2 D1 C3 C2 C1 B2 B1 A1 F4 G2 AUD2 I MACS1 I G4 H3 AUD2 I MACS1 I C11 E11 Z23 C7 AD2 AE3 RAWDATA (0) RAWDATA (1) RAWDATA (2) RAWDATA (3) RAWDATA (4) RAWDATA (5) RAWDATA (6) RAWDATA (7) RAWDATA (8) RAWDATA (9) RAWDATA (10) RAWDATA (11) TGCLK TGHD TGVD VGATE AUDO2 AUDI1
SCS(4)/PIO
SCLK(3)/PIO
C4 D3 C3 F5 J6 G2 Y5 Y6 E14 A15 B15 P23 C8 W23 W24 AC17 AB16 X15 Y15 Y13 AB13 E5 W2 AC16 AA13 B2 A4 A8
PWM (3)/PIO PWM (2)/PIO PWM (1)/PIO PWM (0)/PIO PIO(2) PIP(3) EADDR(23)/PIO EADDR(24)/PIO VF R1 VF B1 VF G1 CSYNC0 SCS(8)/PIO AUD2 I/PIO SDLSEL/PIO AIN3 AIN5 AIN4 AIN6 SDR CKE/PIO XSDR WE/PIO PWM(4)/PIO XECS(5)/PIO AIN7
SO(3)/PIO
D(7)/PIO
IC1103(2/2) MB87M1982BGL-CE1 DIGIC DV
TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 IC2301(4/4)
AUD1 O AUD1 I LRCK WCK LREQ/PIO XEINTO/PI
Z25 W21 V21 Y25 AA25 V3 T3 P2 G1 M23 Q2401
AUDI O AUDI I LRCLK WCK MACS XINTI MACS XINTO XEWR USB CCLK 27M VIC TDO
AD3 AE4 AE2 AE1 AE16 AD16 AE15 AE10 AE11 R2
AUDI2 AUDO1 LPCLK WCLK XEINT(1) XEINT(0) XEWR USB BDATACLK VCLK TDI
IC2301(2/4) MB87M4541BGL VIC4
XFB IOW/PIO CCLK/PIO VCLK VF R2
VF G2
B14 Q2400
VF G LCD
VF R2 VF B2
A15 C14
VF R LCD VF B LCD
BDATA (6) AB11
AD12 BDATA (2)
AC12 BDATA (3)
AD11 BDATA (4)
PWM(5)/PIO ADATA (1) ADATA (2) ADATA (3) ADATA (4) ADATA (5) ADATA (6) BDATA (0) BDATA (3) BDATA (5) BDATA (6) BDATA (4) BDATA (7) SCS(1)/PIO AI(2)/PIO BDATA (1) BDATA (2) ADATA (0) ADATA (7)
M2
M1
M3
M6
H1
K2
K3
N1
L6
K5
K6
L1
L5
J1
J2
J2
AC11 BDATA (5)
AD10 BDATA (7)
ADATA (0)
ADATA (2)
ADATA (3)
ADATA (4)
ADATA (5)
ADATA (6)
ADATA (7)
ADATA (1)
BDATA (0) AE13
AB10
AE12
AD8
AD9
AC9
AC8
AE9
AB9
AE8
BDATA (1)
XSDR CAS/PIO
C SYNC VF R LCD VF G LCD VF B LCD
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN P.C.B.
01
Mar. 2004
CANON INC. 2004
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION

MAIN P.C.B.(3/7)
11 E3V LI3V VTR UNREG E3V 12 VOUT 13 VIN 14 VRO 5 DVDD 2.7V 7 SW VDC RESET
LIDET VBAT CS
2 D100 3 4 Q100 6 LI 3V
25 LI3V DETECT DVDD3V E3V + LI3V EPM 39 18 E3DET 72 CH DET CE 44 CNVSS 7
IC102 BD4207FV BACKUP
SWOUT
FLASH CLK 31 FLASH RTS 32 FLASH RXD1 30 FLASH TXD1 29 MODE RESET 10
CN103 DVDD3V E3V + LI3V EPM CE CNVSS FLASH CLK FLASH RST FLASH RXD1 FLASH TXD1 MODE RESET DEBCLK DEBUD DEBDD XDEBEN CG CS EEP/CG CLK EEP/CG SO DOT CLK OSD I0 OSD I1 VIC HD VIC VD
B7 A15 A2 A3 A4 B2 B3 B4 B5 A1 A6 A8 A10 A12 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15
N.C
11 XOUT X101 10MHz 13 XIN
DC JDET 71
RMC PULSE IN 16
IC100 M30620MCN MODE MI-COM.
XRESET 49
8 X100 32.768KHz 9
XCIN
EJECT SWITCH 66 VTOS EN 17
XCOUT
VIC3 CS 48 VIC3 CLOCK 35 VIC3 TO SUBCOM DATA 34
STOV CS VTOS SCK VTOS DATA STOV DATA
SUBCOM TO VIC3 DATA 33 CAM ON CHARGE INIT CHARGE1 DC V DET VTR ON A/D I A/D V BATT INFO AD ADV MIC L ADV/EXT MIC R 53 CAM ON 41 CHARGE 99 INIT CHARGE1 80 DC V DET 52 VTR ON 90 A/D I 89 A/D V 88 BATT INFO A/D VTOS PC 1
VTOS ACTIVE 24 MTOC MODE2 59 MTOC MODE1 58 MTOC MODE0 57 NTSC XPAL 40 CASSETTE IN SWITCH 67 CASSETTE MEMORY A/D0 84 CASSETTE MEMORY A/D1 85
VTR UNREG E3V E3V+LI3V
87 BATT A/D 96 VREF 97 AVCC 60 VCC2 14 VCC1
CASSETTE MEMORY SDA 28 CASSETTE MEMORY A/D2 86 CASSETTE MEMORY SDL 27 CASSETTE MEMORY ON 26
VIC VD VIC HD OSD I1 OSD I0 DOT CLK CG SO CG CLK CGCS XDEBEN DEBDD DEBUD DEBCLK MODE RESET DC J DET RMC IN XRESET EJECT SW VTOS PC VTOS EN STOV CS VTOS SCK VTOS DATA STOV DATA VTOS ACTIVE STOV MODE2 STOV MODE1 STOV MODE0 NTSC XPAL CAS IN MIC 1 MIC 2 MIC 3 MIC ON ZOOM KEY VTR POW SW CAM POW SW CARD DET CARD PRO CARD ACCESS LED
TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 MAIN P.C.B.
TO SERVO SECTION MAIN P.C.B.
TO CAMERA SECTION-1 CAV P.C.B. CN 1001 TO CAMERA SECTION-2 CAV P.C.B. CN 1001
A1 B1 B54 B55 B53 B46 B47 B56 A49 A48
CN1100 ADV/EXT MIC R ADV MIC L SP SP + LCD EEP SCK LCD EEP SOUT EVF SEN EVF 3V ON EVF 8.5V ON LCD EEP SIN1
KEY P.C.B.
19 EVF SEN 55 EVF 3V ON KEY AD3 95 DIAL CW SWITCH 42 DIAL CCW SWITCH 43 20 EVF 8.5V ON Q102 CN102 CARD ACCESS LED CARD PRO CARD DET VTR UNREG VTR UNREG VTR UNREG DVDD2.7V LCD8.5V LCD5V LCD2.7V LCD2.7V DVDD3V LCD BL ON LCD ON LCD EEP SIN1 LCD EEP SCK LCD EEP SOUT LCD EEP CS LCD CS PNL B/T SW PNL OP SW KEY AD4 KEY AD2 KEY AD1 KEY AD0 C SYNC PANEL B PANEL G PANEL R LI 3V CARD DAT1 CARD DAT CARD DAT2 CARD SCK CARD CMD CARD DAT3 24 16 15 47 46 45 14 37 36 35 34 17 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 27 26 22 21 20 19 33 30 29 28 23 11 9 8 5 3 2 KEY AD3 DIAL-CW DIAL-CCW CHAGE LED BT100
LITHIUM BATTERY
BT101
68 PHOTO SWITCH TO SPEAKER FPC UNIT 1 2 4 8 6 7 9 10 5 CN100 SP1 SP2 + CK 3V P5V PICT SW KAY LED0 HALF PHOTO SW PHOTO SW ZOOM AD CHAGE LED 50 69 HARF PHOTO SWITCH DVDD2.7V P5V 23 KEY LED0 Q105 54 PRINT SW LCD ON 47 LCD EEP SIN LCD EEP SCK LCD EEP SOUT 4 5 3 VTR UNREG
LCD ON LCD EEP SIN1 LCD EEP SCK LCD EEP SOUT PANEL EEP CS LCD CS KEY AD4 KEY AD2 KEY AD1 KEY AD0 PNL B/T SW PNL OP SW CHAGE LED
DVDD2.7V LCD8.5V LCD5V LCD2.5V LCDD3V
PANEL EEP CS 61 CN101 GPN/P AE TAPE/CARD SW START/STOP SW CAM PW SW VTR PW SW NET PW SW LCD CS 63 75 PAE/GREEN SW 78 TAPE/CARD SW 70 START/STOP 51 NET POWER SW 77 CAM POWER SWITCH 76 VTR POWER SWITCH TO CAMERA SECTION-4 MAIN P.C.B. KEY AD4 82 KEY AD2 93 KEY AD1 92 KEY AD0 91 PANEL BOTTOM/TOP SWITCH 65 PANEL OPEN SWITCH 64 CHAGE LED 50 C SYNC VF B LCD VF G LCD VF R LCD CARD DAT1 CARD DAT CARD SCK CARD DAT3 CARD CMD CARD DAT2
TO OPERATION KEY UNIT
7 6 4 3 2 1
LI3V
TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN P.C.B.
CN101 49 CARD DAT3 48 CARD CMD 46 CARD SCK 43 CARD DAT2 42 CARD DAT 40 CARD DAT1 37 DVDD2.7V 36 CARD DET 35 CARD PRO 34 DVDD3V 32 KEY AD0 31 KEY AD1 30 KEY AD2 29 KEY AD4 28 LI 3V 27 CARD ACCESS LED 25 PNL OP SW 24 PNL B/T SW 23 PANEL R 22 PANEL G 21 PANEL B 18 C SYNC 17 LCD2.7V 16 LCD2.7V 15 LCD5V 14 LCD8.5V 13 LCD CS 12 LCD EEP CS 11 LCD EEP SOUT 10 LCD EEP SCK 9 LCD EEP SIN1 8 LCD ON 7 LCD BL ON 6 VTR UNREG 5 VTR UNREG 4 VTR UNREG
CN100 MMC VDD MMC RSV MMC CMD MMC SCK MMC DAT MMC DAT1 MMC DAT2 CARD PRO CARD DET SW103 STOP SW100 DATA/SELF LED100 SW101 CARD MIX
4 1 2 5 7 8 9 10 12
SD CARD
SW104 PLAY
SW105 FF
SW102 REW
SW110 AEB/REC PAUSE
SW106 DE ON/OFF
SW107 DE SEL SW109
SW108 END SEARCH
CN102 LCD BL ON LCD ON LCD EEP SIN1 LCD EEP SCK LCD EEP SOUT LCD EEP CS LCD CS C SYNC PANEL B PANEL G PANEL R PNL B/T SW VTR UNREG VTR UNREG VTR UNREG LCD8.5V LCD3V LCD3V LCD5V
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 9 5 4 3 1 23 22 21 13 11 10 12
TO LCD P.C.B. SECTION LCD P.C.B. CN901
01
Mar. 2004
CANON INC. 2004
SERVO SECTION
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B. (4/7)

CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
D.W 37 D.V 35 D.U 34 D.COM 33 CN300 W W V V U U COIL COM DPG DFG SENS COM 10 11 3 4 1 2 9 6 5 7
DMC III
DRUM MOTOR
PG FG
D D C C
VM VS VM VS
D VM D VS
28 D.VM 29 D.VS 60 C.VM
D.PGIN 20 D.FGPGIN + 19 D.FGIN 18
C VS Q306 CFG DPG DFG
61 C.VS C.HW 12 15 C.FGSMT 16 D.PGSMT 21 D.FGSMT 30 D.EC 40 L.FRB 41 L.REF Q304 57 D.PS 58 C.PS 59 C.FBR 62 C.EC C.HW + 11 C.HU + 10 C.HU C.HV + 9 8 7
IC301 BD6636KV MOTOR DRIVE
C.HV
C.FGIN 14 C.FGIN + 13 DVDD 2.7V C.U C.V C.W 2 3 5
CN302 C H W W+ C H+ U+ U V+ V CFG2 CFG1 U COIL U COIL W COIL W COIL V COIL V COIL CFG VCC
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 17
CAPSTAN MOTOR
FG
LOADING MOTOR
DEW SENSOR
CAP VS CNT CFG DPG DFG DERR LMO FRBL LMO FRBH LODE ON DRUM ON CAP ON CAP FWD CERR T REEL FG S REEL FG DA CFG DEW MSW AD TAPE TOP TAPE END TAPE LED REC PROOF REEL LED CONT DA TREEL DA SREEL CAS IN
VTR UNREG DVDD 2.7V P 5V
27 UNREG 22 VCC 45 L.VM
L.REV 44 L.FWD 42 R.IN1 + 46 R.IN1 47 DVDD 2.7V
CN301 LOAD ( ) LOAD ( ) LOAD ( + ) LOAD ( + ) DEW + MSW SENS MSW VCC MSW VSS
6 7 1 2 8 5 4 3
MODE SW
48 ROUT1 51 ROUT2
R.IN2 + 49 R.IN2 50
TAPE END SENSOR TAPE TOP SENSOR

1 2 20 21 14 15 5 4 6 7 12 8 10 9 11 16 18 17 19
BOT DET EOT DET Q303 Q303 Q301 DVDD 2.7V
P 5V
Q300
Q305 CAS IN MIC1 MIC2 MIC3 MIC ON
DVDD 2.7V
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN P.C.B.
CN303 BOT E BOT C EOT E EOT C LED A LED K REC PRF MIC3 MIC2 MIC1 C IN T IN T IN + T OUT T OUT + S IN S IN + S OUT S OUT +
SAFETY SW
MIC
CASSETTE IN SW
MIC2 MIC3 DA CFG
3 1
FG
TAKE UP REEL
IC300 NJM12904R OPE AMP
2 7 6 5
FG
SUPPLY REEL
01
Mar. 2004
CANON INC. 2004
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL USB SIGNAL ELURA70 A ELURA65 A MVX250i E DM-FV M100 ONLY
Q2311 WIDE DET AC14 AIN13 E18 VRH1 C12 AGC PWM Q3501 W1 TO JACK1,2 SECTION JACK1 P.C.B. CN51 CN2101 26 9 21 17 15 20 7 8 5 3 2 12 10 24 25 23 VTR UNREG AVDD 2.7V P5V D D+ VBUS AV DET CAM LED V I/O/HP R AV R AV L/HP L P GY OUT Y GY OUT RMC IN CHARGE LED DC J SW VTR UNREG AVDD2.7V P5V F9 P5 SCS(6)/PIO CDATA(5)/PIO XECS(4)/PIO
MAIN P.C.B. (5/7)

TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN P.C.B. D D+
EXT RDY1/PI XECS(1)/PIO XEWRL EDREQ/PIO EDACK/PIO SCS(9)/PIO SI(3)/PIO
T6 X1 X12 V5 W5 B7 E10
RDY XECS1 XEWRL XDREQ XDACK USB FS EN MACS XRST
B12 CLAMP PWM B19 VRH2 Q2310 A12 ACC PWM F17 C IN
EDATA (0) AB11 AA11 X11 AC10 AB10 AA10
C18 Y IN B20 COMP IN
A5 AVDD1.4V Q2309 AVDD2.7V P3 WIDE CONT HA4.7V Q2308 R3 Q3503 LETTER CONT Q2313 R1
SCS(5)/PIO
CDATA(6)/PIO
IC2301 (3/4) MB87M4541BGL VIC4
Y10 X10 AC9 AB9 AA9 Y9 X9
CDATA(4)/PIO CDATE(7)/PIO
E15 BYPASS
A19 C FB TO JACK1,2 SECTION JACK2 P.C.B. CN91 CN2102 7 6 2 10 13 12 11 S DET Y I/O C I/O EJECT SW KEY AD3 DIAL-CCW DIAL-CW LINE IN TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN P.C.B. KEY AD3 DIAL-CW DIAL-CCW DC J DET CHAGE LED RMC IN EJECT SW XRESET 75 Q2305 75 Q2306 75 Y16 Q2307 Q2312 SI VDHGL VL REC MUTE SHOE ID1 SHOE ID2 SHOE ON AIF SCLK HP MUTE C16 Y FB E16 COMP FB B17 C O A18 Y O B18 COMP O XECS(2)/PIO SCLK(2)/PIO AC25 D(4)/PIO AA7 EADDR (0) X21 D(5)/PIO SO(2)/PIO M24 TDI LPS/PIO AB17 AIN1 AB15 AIN9 F7 UNT CLKI/PIO SOUND PIO (5) SCS(3)/PIO XECS(0) XRESET EADDR (22) AC6 AC3 AC5 AC2 AC1 AA6 AB5 AB4 AB1 AA1 AB6 AA5 AA4 AB3 AB2 AA2 AA3 W5 Y7 X7 EADDR (0) EADDR (1) EADDR (2) TO POWER SUPPLY SECTION MAIN P.C.B. VTR ON IC3201 SHOE ID1 SHOE ID2 SHOE ON ST VDHGL VL EADDR (3) EADDR (4) EADDR (5) EADDR (6) EADDR (7) EADDR (8) TO SERVO SECTION MAIN P.C.B. MIC2 MIC3 DA CFG CN1100 B18 B29 B31 A60 A59 A58 A46 A39 A36 A45 A41 A42 A40 A38 A47 DA CFG P GY OUT Y GY OUT AV R AV L/HP L V I/O/HP R SOUND AIF CS AMCK HP MUTE XPDI REC MUTE AIF SCLK AIF SO HP ON EADDR (9) EADDR (10) EADDR (11) EADDR (12) EADDR (13) EADDR (14) EADDR (15) EADDR (16) EADDR (17) EADDR (18) EADDR (19) EADDR (20) E1 A0 D1 C1 A1 B1 D2 C2 A2 B5 A5 C5 D5 B6 A6 C6 D6 E6 B2 C3 D4 A19 D3 NC3 F1 CE G1 OE A4 WE B4 RESET DO0 E2 H2 E3 H3 H4 E4 H5 E5 F2 Y3 Z1 FROM AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 IC2301 (4/4) EDATA (15)
AC8 AB8 AA8
AA12 XEWRU
AMCK
M25 TMS
N25
TCK
N20
X23
B11
B10
X24
W6
E1
A1
X2
V2
XERD
TRST
Q3504
N.C
CN2900 B9 TDI B8 TMS A7 TCK B10 TDO A1 V I/O B7 TRST B5 MIC2 B6 MIC3 B3 VTR ON IC3201
AIF SO
AIF CS
HP ON
XPDI
Y1
F8
EDATA (0) EDATA (1) EDATA (2) EDATA (3) EDATA (4) EDATA (5) EDATA (6) EDATA (7) EDATA (8) EDATA (9) EDATA (10) EDATA (11) EDATA (12) EDATA (13) EDATA (14) EDATA (15)
TO CAMERA SECTION-2 CAV P.C.B. CN1001 TO CAMERA SECTION-1 CAV P.C.B. CN1001
IC2300 MX29LV160ABXEI FLASH
G2 F3 G3 F4 G5 F5 DO15 G6
RDY XECS1 XEWRL XDREQ XDACK USB FS EN MACS XRST MACS TDO TCK TMS EDATA (0) to (15) EADDR (0) to (22) XERD XEWRU TRST
TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN P.C.B.
01
Mar. 2004
CANON INC. 2004
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2
DIGITAL DV SIGNAL DIGITAL (VIDEO+AUDIO SIGNAL) DRUM SERVO SIGNAL CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
MVX250i E,MVX200i E,MVX200 E
MAIN P.C.B. (6/7)

SDRAM 2.7V DQ0 1 3 9 VDD1 VDDQ1 VDDQ2 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 2 4 5 7 8 MDATA (0) MDATA (1) MDATA (2) MDATA (3) MDATA (4) MDATA (5) MDATA (6) MDATA (7) MDATA (8) MDATA (9) MDATA (10) MDATA (11) MDATA (12) MDATA (13) MDATA (14) MDATA (15) ADDR (0) ADDR (1) ADDR (2) ADDR (3) ADDR (4) ADDR (5) ADDR (6) ADDR (7) ADDR (8) ADDR (9) ADDR (10) ADDR (11) ADDR (12) ADDR (13) DQML XWE XCAS XRAS XCS CKE MCLK DQMU CAP VS CNT LMO FRBL LMO FRBH LOAD ON CAP ON DRUM ON REC PROOF REEL LED CONT TO SERVO SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CAP VS CNT LMO FRBL LMO FRBH LOAD ON CAP ON DRUM ON REC PROOF REEL LED CONT DA CFG DA SREEL DA TREEL TAPE TOP TAPE END MSW AD DEW CAS IN T REEL FG S REEL FG DERR CERR CFG DPG DFG CAP FWD TAPE LED DA CFG DA SREEL DA TREEL TAPE TOP TAPE END MSW AD DEW CAS IN T REEL FG S REEL FG DERR CERR CFG DPG DFG CAP FWD TAPE LED K21 K20 J23 J20 H25 H24 H26 H21 F21 F23 F24 F25 G20 G21 G25 H20 E19 F19 C20 E20 C21 A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 A24 A25 B24 B25 E24 E25 D24 D23 C23 C24 D25 E23 X8 G3 D1 B5 E2 W3 E3 V6 B2 E6 A2 AA14 AB14 AA15 AC15 Y14 P21 R23 R24 R20 U25 R21 T24 P24 AA23 MDATA (0) MDATA (1) MDATA (2) MDATA (3) MDATA (4) MDATA (5) MDATA (6) MDATA (7) MDATA (8) MDATA (9) MDATA (10) MDATA (11) MDATA (12) MDATA (13) MDATA (14) MDATA (15) ADDR (0) ADDR (1) ADDR (2) ADDR (3) ADDR (4) ADDR (5) ADDR (6) ADDR (7) ADDR (8) ADDR (9) ADDR (10) ADDR (11) ADDR (12) ADDR (13) DQML XWE XCAS XRAS XCS CKE MCLK DQMU EADDR(8)/PIO PIO(8) PIO(9) SCS(3)/PIO PIO(7) BRQ/PIO TCLK/PI BGRNTX/PIO PWM(5)/PIO PWM(7)/PIO PWM(6)/PIO AIN14 AIN15 AIN10 AIN11 AIN12 RFGT/PI RFGS/PI PWMD PWMC CFG DPG UTIL SWP (4) UTIL SWP (3) UTIL SWP (2) UTIL SWP (1) DFG XRCLK CAPDIR/PIO D(6)/PIO RCLK UTIL SWP (0) CTL(0)/PIO AA22 PB H V24 Q2000 1 6 PB ON XRDAT U21 34 43 42 RDAT U20 35 REC CONT UTIL SWP(5) A14 32 36 REC ON 5 38 REC H X25 HA 3.3V HA 4.7V VD HD OSD I(0)/PI OSD I(1)/PI DOTCLK/PIO D(0)/PIO D(1)/PIO D(2)/PIO CTL(1)/PIO SYSCLK/PIO AIN12 XESC(3)/PIO XEINT2/PI PIO(6) SCS(0)/PIO UAT CLKO/PIO TX/PIO RX/PIO XDEBEN DEBUD N21 R25 N24 N23 P25 W20 AB25 AA24 Y21 AB24 AA16 X5 U6 H6 E7 A3 C6 B3 R6 R5 T2 T1 H5 F11 F12 A10 A9 VIC VD VIC HD OSD I0 OSD I1 DOT CLK STOV MODE0 STOV MODE1 STOV MODE2 CG CS STOV CS ZOOM KEY CARD DET CARD PRO CARD ACCESS LED VTOS EN VTOS SCK VTOS DATA STOV DATA XDEBEN DEBUD DEBDD DEBCLK NTSC XPAL CG SO CG CLK VTOS ACTIVE VTOS PC CN2900 VTR POW SW MODE RESET CAM POW SW FCH 0 SWP PBRF VIC VD VIC HD OSD I0 OSD I1 DOT CLK STOV MODE0 STOV MODE1 STOV MODE2 CG CS STOV CS ZOOM KEY CARD DET CARD PRO CARD ACCESS LED VTOS EN VTOS SCK VTOS DATA STOV DATA XDEBEN DEBUD DEBDD DEBCLK NTSC XPAL CG SO CG CLK VTOS ACTIVE VTOS PC VTR POW SW MODE RESET CAM POW SW FCH 0 TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN P.C.B. TPA XTPA TPB XTPB AB19 AA18 AC20 AB20 CN2102 XTPB TPB XTPA TPA 18 19 17 16 TO JACK 1,2 SECTION JACK2 P.C.B. CN91
14 VDD2 27 VDD3 43 VDDQ3 49 VDDQ4
DQ5 10 DQ6 11 DQ7 13 DQ8 42 DQ9 44 DQ10 45 DQ11 47 DQ12 48 DQ13 50 DQ14 51 DQ15 53 A0 23 A1 24
IC2302 EM668165TS-7G SDRAM
A2 25 A3 26 A4 29 A5 30 A6 31 A7 32 A8 33 A9 34 A10/AP 22 A11 35 BA1 21 BA0 20 LDQM 15 /WE 16 /CAS 17 /RAS 18 /CS 19 CKE 37 CLK 38 UDQM 39
IC2301(4/4) MB87M4541BGL VIC4
DEBDD DEBCLK PIO(4) SO(1)/PIO SCLK(1)/PIO SCLK(0)/PIO SO(0)/PIO
A3 B2 A5 A6 A8 A10
NC
IC2000 LD502W VRP2

46 45
H1A H1B H2A H2B
CN2000 H1A H1B H2A H2B
2 3 5 6
CH-1 HEAD
CH-2 HEAD
DRUM UNIT
VIDEO SIGNAL
TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION1 IC2301 (3/4)
21 GCA PBRF SWP K25 T21 17 2 EPH GDL EQ VCO
AUDIO SIGNAL
TO CAMERA SECTION4 IC2301 (2/4)
U24
U23
C13
V25
RAGC
RAPC
29
30
13
11
12
28
25
26
22
23
B13
A13
F14
F13
L24
GDH CONT
GDH CONT
GDL CONT
GDL CONT
EQ CONT
EQ CONT
XRCLK
RAGC
RAPC
01
Mar. 2004
EQFC
RAFC
RCLK
XRCLK
RAGC
RAPC
EQFC
RAFC
RCLK
CANON INC. 2004
POWER SUPPLY SECTION

DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL ELURA70 A ELURA65 A MVX250i E DM-FV M100 ONLY
MAIN P.C.B.(7/7)
CN891 ADV/EXT MIC R 12 ADV MIC L 11 ID-2 9 ST STSP 8 ST VDHGL 7 ID-1 6 SHOE UNREG 2 SHOE UNREG 1 Q3209 ADV/EXT MIC R ADV MIC L ST STSP SHOE ID1 ST VDHGL VL SHOE ID2 SHOE ON TO SHOE CONNECTOR
FU3205
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION-3 MAIN P.C.B. TO CAMERA SECTION-3 MAIN P.C.B.
TO JACK1,2 SECTION JACK1 P.C.B. CN3211
2 1
CN3201 DC + DC FU1810
FU3201 Q3210 FU3202 FU3203
TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B. TO SERVO SECTION MAIN P.C.B.
C VS D VS Q1801 VTR UNREG 34 OSC 46 CH1 33 Q1814 50 2 Q3204 1.4V (CH1) LPF LPF 5 4 LPF MACS 1.4V DVDD 1.4V AVDD 1.4V
Q1813 TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MAIN P.C.B. DC V DET A/D I A/D V BATT INFO AD CAM ON CHARGE INIT CHARGE1 VTR ON
27 VCC 1 3 DVDD 2.7V DIF 2.7V SDRAM 2.7V 43 Q3203 2.7V (CH2) 53 2 LPF LPF 5 4 AVDD 2.7V AA 2.7V M SDRAM 2.7V LCD 2.7V
CH2
TO BATTERY TERMIANL
3 1 2 4 5
CN3202 BATT INFO AD BATT BATT BATT + BATT +
1 Q1815 15 2 3 CH3 2 40 Q3205 3V (CH3) 56
OUTPUT DRIVE 14 VCC Q1812
IC1810 MB3833A-E1 CHARGE IC
HA 3V 5 4 LPF CAM 3V DVDD 3V
1 DSC POWER SAVE
12
13
IC3201 MB3881 DC/DC CONVERTER
37 CH4 2 Q3206 P5V (CH4) 57 5 5 4 V IN
IC3203 TK11147CS V OUT 4.7V REGULATOR
AA 4.7V HA 4.7V
LPF 1 3
LCD 5V P 5V
21 3 2 1 CH5 Q3207 DRUM VS (CH5) 60 2 D VM C VM TO SEEVO SECTION MAIN P.C.B.
IC1811 MM3012XN OPE AMP

4
22
15 CH6 Q3208 CAP VS (CH6) 61 2
16
11 ON/OFF CONT. 28 TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B. VTR ON IC3201 30 31 29 CH1,3,4,8 CH5,6 CH7 CH2 5 CH8 2 1 7 D3203 8 CCD 15V 62 Q3201 3 6 T3202 CH7 4 5 D3205 CCD 7V
64
Q3202
D3202 LCD 8.5V
01
Mar. 2004
CANON INC. 2004
LCD P.C.B. SECTION

DATA COMMUNICATION
LCD P.C.B.
VTR UNREG VTR UNREG 5 Q4201 SWITCH ON 1 LCD 5V Q903 VCC5V 3 CONTROL 4 2 3 4 1 VTR UNREG 6 4 3 2 Q4203 Q902 BACK LIGHT Q901 Q4204 WP4202 WP4201 2 3 Q4202 DRIVER 4 1 5 1 5 5 6 7 T4201
IC4201 R1223N152H DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

LCD 2.7V
VTR UNREG LCD 8.5V CN901 VTR UNREG 4 VTR UNREG 5 VTR UNREG 6 LCD 8.5V 14 LCD 5V 15 LCD 2.7V 16 LCD 2.7V 17 LCD ON 8 LCD BL ON 7 PANEL R 24 PANEL G 23 PANEL B 22 C SYNC 18 LCD CS 13 12 LCD EEP CS 11 LCD EEP SOUT 10 LCD EEP SCK 9 LCD EEP SIN1 26 PANEL BT SW 27 PANEL BT SW LCD 5V 18 VDD1 LCD 2.7V 5 VCC1-1 29 VDD2 36 VCC2 VCC 5V
43 VCC1-2
DA OUT
BL CONTROL 41
45 R/R-Y
R OUT 34
44 G/Y
G OUT 35
46 B/B-Y LCS ECS SO CLK SO E CS CLK SO SO 1 2 3 4 CS SK DI DO
B OUT
33
VST 24 VCK 23
TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION KEY P.C.B. CN102
IC901 BR9010RFV-W EEPROM
VCC
LCD 2.7V 47 SYNCIN
IC902 CXM3009TQ LCD DRIVE
EN
22
DWN 21 XSTB 20 PCG 19 HST 17 WIDE 16 CHK2 15
L CS CLK SO CN903 PANEL BT SW LCD2.7V
6 7 8
SEN SCK SDAT
CHK1 14 RGT 13 REF 42
CN902 VDD RED GREEN BLUE VST VCK EN DWN XSTBY PCG HST WIDE HCK2 HCK1 RGT REF COM CS PSIG
18 4 5 3 22 21 20 19 14 13 12 9 8 7 2 11 24 23 6
LCD UNIT LCD
26
LCD 8.5V Q904
01
Mar. 2004
PDF
TO LCD DETECT FPC
1 3
COM-DC LCD 2.7V PSIG OUT
38 37
CANON INC. 2004
JACK1,2 SECTION
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL USB SIGNAL
JACK1 P.C.B.
CN42 1 3 4 6 8 EXT L ADV/EXT MIC R EXT P DET INT MIC R INT MIC L
MIC JACK
LED62 VTR UNREG
CN43 TO MIC UNIT 2 4 INT MIC R INT MIC L
CN41
ELURA70 A ELURA65 A MVX250i E DM-FV M100 ONLY
P5V LED61 TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B. CN2101 CN51 2 3 4 7 10 12 15 17 19 20 22 24 25 CHAGE LED RMC IN DC J SW VBUS D D+ P GY OUT Y GY OUT CAM LED AV DET V I/O/HP R AV R AV L/HP L
ELURA70 A ELURA65 A MVX250i E DM-FV M100 ONLY
RU71 P5V 2 VCC
REMOTE CONTROLER
VO
CN3551 VBUS ( + 5V) D D+
1 2 3
USB JACK
2
IC1601 OUT ENC-03MA VCC P SENSOR GYRO
AVDD2.7V
OUT
IC1602 ENC-03MB VCC Y SENSOR GYRO
AVDD2.7V
AV JACK
CN81 TO POWER SUPPLY SECTION MAIN P.C.B. CN3201 CN3211 1 2 DC + DC
DC JACK
CN3212
CN11 XTPB TPB XTPA TPA
1 2 3 4
DV JACK
TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 MAIN P.C.B. CN2102 TO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 MAIN P.C.B. CN2102
CN91 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 14 15 19 TPB XTPB XTPA TPA KEY AD3 DIAL CCW DIAL CW EJECT SW S DET Y I/O C I/O PUSH
SW22 MENU SW21 SW23 EJECT ON
Y G1
C G2
S JACK
CN31
01
Mar. 2004
CANON INC. 2004

Canon Mvx250i Mvx200i e SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon Mvx250i Mvx200i e SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon Mvx250i Mvx200i e SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Video Product

MVX250i E MVX200i E MVX200 E

Canon Inc. Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.

c CANON INC. 2004

First Edition : Mar. 2004 First Print : Mar. 2004

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Easy Direct Button (Print/Share Button)

Print setup information is displayed for 6 seconds

Pressing the Direct button starts printing

The Transfer menu is displayed

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1-2 Product Specifications Comparison Chart

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1-3 Function and Performance List

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Recorder Minimum illumination Night mode Low Light mode

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Center-bottom-weighted average Tape

High image quality 16:9

Card Area marker display

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Screen segments Motion video shooting Tape Card (MVX250i E)

Still image recording

Negative-positive reversal Built-in Video light

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-1-2 Design Concept-2

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-1-3 Differences in Appearance of Overseas Models MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Model MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Bluish, high-brilliance metallic finish

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-2 18 zoom lens

2-2-2 New technologies and new functions

Lens incorporated in MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Lens incorporated in MVX3i E

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-3 Easy Direct Button ([

or other indicator is displayed), the

button lights up blue. Press

Off Direct printer connection (2)

Press the SETUP button (3)

(Press the MENU button)

Press the SETUP button

is displayed), press the SETUP button.

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-3-2 Direct Transfer

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

This proceeds to the Menu screen.

Startup conditions 2 and 3

Button turns off

Select Image screen

Button lights up No Image Warning screen

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT